• Operating Procedure

  • Maintenance Procedure

  • Troubleshooting

  • Operating Procedure

  • Maintenance Procedure

  • Troubleshooting

  • Calendar

  • Job Listings

  • Initial Job Setup

  • Checklist

  • Pre Production Checklist

  • Functions

  • Upgrade Features

  • CNC Processes

  • CW Manufacturing Processes

  • CW Designer Processes

  • Checklist

  • Help Manual

  • Optomising

  • Selecting the Post

  • Opening a Job

  • Setting the Depth of the First Pass

  • Corner Cabinets

  • Pantries

  • Drawer Fronts

  • Job arrives in pending -> Check order against database and schedule if correct, return if modifications are needed.

  • Pre Start-Up Checklist

  • Turning ON the Machine

  • Calibrating the Machine

  • Confirming the Tool

  • Loading the Scissor Lifts

  • Running a Job

  • Pausing/Resuming the Machine

  • Turning OFF the Machine

  • Unloading the Tool

  • Skimming the Spoil Board

  • Touching Off the Tool

  • Offsetting a Tool

  • Manually Changing Tools

  • Manually Printing Labels

  • Manually Loading a Sheet

  • Changing the X Detect on a Scissor Lift

  • Daily Maintenance

  • Weekly Maintenance

  • Monthly Maintenance

  • Quarterly Maintenance

  • Half Yearly Maintenance

  • Implementing Software Updates

  • Photo Cell Alarm

  • Material Loading Error

  • Single Print Error

  • Readfile Error

  • Paper Jam

  • No Ribbon

  • CNC Error Codes

  • Pre Start-Up Checklist

  • Turning ON the Machine

  • Running the Machine

  • T30 Quick Select Menu

  • Loading Edgetape

  • Turning OFF the Machine

  • Cleaning the Glue Roller

  • Pneumatic Systems

  • Cleaning the Machine

  • The calendar page is where you find the jobs in each day of the week for delivery, 2pac pick up dates and general memos.

    The pencil buttons next to the date of each day allows you to write a memo.

    There are a couple of categories to choose from but the main category you want to choose is “2 Pac Pickup Date”. This lets you set a date for the 2 packer to pick up the material to be painted.

  • Symbols

  • Menu

  • Job Name

  • Contact

  • Journals

  • Room

  • Styles

  • Cabinets/Panels

  • Benchtops

  • Accessories

  • Appliances

  • Delivery

  • Installation

  • Download Drawing File

  • Check that Heights, Widths and Depths match between database and drawing.

  • Check for extra rooms in drawing.

  • Ignore notes entered into electronic room drawings.

  • Check for appliance specs.

  • Drawing

  • When saving to Production folder (Jobs) remember to save with order number and in cabinet vision to change titles in job properties.

  • Room Defaults

    Opening a new Kitchen in Cabinet Ware will bring you to the Room Defaults window on the parameters tab.

    Here you will see a number of parameters in which you can change to suit the kitchen you are processing.

    The following is an overview of each parameter =>

  • Now we can look towards a shortcut which will cut out changing every parameter in the Room Default.

    Load Default

    The Load Default button, which is located on the right hand side of the tab, will take you to a template page with different settings we can select to suit our kitchen.

    These templates will have different options to choose from:

  • Lastly you can choose the Cabinet Starting #. This will allow you to start the kitchen from any number, handy for when you have multiple rooms.

  • Abbreviation List

  • Helpful Notes

    • When ordering board & edge tape for jobs order 12 working days from the delivery date (Include the delivery date & count back)

    • When a removable cabinet is in the design for a future dishwasher or no panels either side of a dishwasher, edge the bottom of the cabinets either side.

    • Change cabinet height for rangehoods to door height - (In clients order under cabinets/panels)

    • Standard hinge boring are at 96mm & 64mm.

    • With glass doors minus 110mm for COL doors & 118mm for Polytec doors off the length & width of the door for your glass size - Door glass is at 3mm & Shelves at 6mm - Lead time - 5 working days.

    • To change whiteboard shelves to glass shelves.
      Go into multicross - Double click on shelf - Click on materials.
      Press “G” for glass on the keyboard - Click ok.

    • Use THREDBO for painted doors & MANCHESTER for vinyl in room defaults.

    • Kickers & Pantry doors for builders pantry.
      Draw a wall on the plan - Click on custom panel - Untick Wainscot to ceiling
      Untick Counter top - Type in height click ok - Type in width click ok - Place panel on the wall.

    Laminate Benchtops - Allow 3 days before kitchen delivery date.

    • To print a customers plan off the system - Go into rooms
      Click on download drawing - Click on the last date - Print plan.

    • To send a SMS to a customer - Click on Rooms - Click on order (Blue Dot)
      Click on more options - Click on send a message - Click on customers mobile number - Type in your message - Click save.

    Mitred Bar Backs - Add 6mm for 22.5 angle & 14mm for 45 angle to each end that needs to be mitred - Working off the back size of the cabinet = Short point of mitre.

    • When a job has more then one room under the same job number make sure you number the Cad ID numbers in the data base in running order.
      This needs to be done before you start detailing the job, failing to do so will lose the work that has being done.
    • To change the cabinet numbers in the drawing to running order go to room defaulfs and type in the number in the Cabinet Starting # Field change to suit each room in the job. Also change the Cad ID number in the data base to suit, Click on the Cad ID Tab type in the number you need and press save.
      Wardrobes Use Upper Cabinets as construction file when gables go to the floor. Also tick To Floor & No Notch under Toe Kicks
    • Control X = Cut
    • Control C = Copy
    • Control V = Paste

    Copy and paste cabinets to lock in interior bottom to stop cabinet changing. EG - Hold down the control key and press the C then the V key.

    • Use Open Shelf construction when using a open whiteboard carcass for example in a walk in wardrobe.
    • Always use horizontal & vertical Partitions and Not horizontal & vertical Dividers when detailing. Dividers can be used when adding in shelving E.G. Fixed shelf, Adjustable shelf & Shallow shelf.
    • Use visualtrig.com to workout right angle sizes.
    • Use Pantry - 30mm Reveal or Pantry - 30mm Reveal (GO) as file construction then using 30mm finger pull for drawers.
    • When you have a woodgrain job you need to tick the Match grain box for drawers and anything that needs matching within one cabinet.
      Left click then right click on the cabinet then click on Match Grain.
    • To add in inner drawers select Partitions & Dividers click on Pullouts then click on cabinet, move up or down to suit.
    • Inner Drawers Raise bottom inner drawer to have a 20mm gap at the bottom. This is to help with the drawer bowing.
    • Move shelves up or down through Partitions & Dividers
    • Use 96mm hinge boring when using Aluminum doors.
    • To put a shelf between drawers Duplicate a shelf in multicross cover the shelf that you just duplicated and move the shelf that you first duplicated from to the position that you need.
    • Rangehood ducts to be the full depth of the cabinet.
    • Tallboy Lemans 11 allow 1265mm space between bottom & fixed shelf.
    • Add “ r “ to right hand back all cabinets with two backs.
      Pull Boy Bins
      Select pull boy bin in (Drawer type) then select (drawer slide) to suit.
      Euro Cargo Bin
      Has it’s own runners no need to add drawer in.
      Servo Drive
      Build cabinets @ 550mm deep With No Void. Bring cabinets off the wall by 10mm in drawing.
      Tip On Drawers
      You must change the drawer box setting to suit Tip Ons drawers.

  • Cabinet Adjustments

    • Make sure when your modifying cabinets that you adjust everything that you need too do before going into Multi Cross failing to do so, will lose the work that you have done in Multi Cross.
      This also applies to re numbering Cad ID numbers in the date base with more then one room attached to the job.

  • Bench Top Thickness Adjustments

    • Check All Bench Top effected cabinetry for Sizing corrections required.

    • Adjusting the Construction File on these cabinets will re size cabinet to the correctly set Room Defaults.

    • Due to a CAD Software limitation at the Design stage this is a standard procedure.

    http://screencast.com/t/UUP64JxFuNM

  • Base Cabinets

  • Wall Cabinet

  • Tall Cabinet

  • Panels

  • Checklist When Detailing Jobs

    Most common mistakes. = XXX

    • Hinge positions. XXX (pantry’s, to close to adjustable shelf holes)
    • Reveals. XXX
    • Finished ends & biscuit ends.
    • Interior bottoms. XXX
    • Construction files.
    • Shelving. (Amounts, positions & type.)
    • Drawer front heights & hardware height & depths.
    • Back scribes.
    • Blind panel sizing.
    • Radius for Tops,Bottoms & Shelving to required cabinets.
    • Interior & exterior files. XXX
    • Correct quantity’s.
    • Appliances (Check sizing.) Ventilation requirements.
    • Heat barriers for Cooktops.
    • Room dimensions.
    • Door to floor clearances.
    • Corner filler sizing.
    • Correct edging to parts.
    • Grain matching.
    • Numbers & sizes of cabinets to match on plan with data base.
    • Added hardware e.g. Bins,Lazy Susan etc. - (Hinge & drawer position.)
    • Glass shelving.
    • Room defaults.
    • Inner drawers (Choose Runner Hardware)
    • Check drawer hardware doesn’t interfere with top rail.
    • Mulitcross - E.G. Radius on tops,bottoms & shelves, adding “r” to right hand corner backs.
    • Bar edge detail - (to end panels)

  • Short Cuts

  • Top Tab

  • Right side Tab

  • Bottom Tab

  • Dynamic Multicross

  • COL Glass Doors

  • Producing the plans

    • Click on a elevation in your drawing - Click on snapshot - (Top tool bar)
    • Click OK to page number 1 - Repeat to all elevations - Click on multidraw
    • Arrange elevations on the page to suit - Print & click on (Fit) - Print & Save 2 copy’s - Click close.
    • Print plan with cabinet report - For cabinet report press control D - In reports - click on cabinet report - Click OK - Print 2 copy’s - Laminate 1 copy of each.
    • Save the other copy’s for the factory’s paperwork.

    Batching Job into a file

    • Cutlist (Bottom tool bar) Click on Batched - All rooms - File - OK.
    • Re open job if error window appears.

    CNC

    • Click on CNC center (Bottom tool bar) - File - Import cutlist - Click on cutlist - Find the job by double clicking on company & month - Double click on file - OK.
    • Check each piece by using the < > buttons (top of screen)
    • Click on the Screen To Machine Icon (top of screen)
    • Click on the Windows/File Explorer (bottom of screen)
    • Choose P: Drive - Double click on the month that the job is due for delivery.
    • Click on ( New Folder ) Copy & paste or type in job number & name in the folder.
    • Double click on the folders icon.
    • Click on new folder - Paste or type in the job number, name & colour.
    • Click on new folder - Paste or type in the job number,name & whiteboard.

    Parts Screen

    • Click on Filter parts - Materials - Tick on coloured board - Click OK.
    • Click on Nest - Run - Click OK.
    • Click on sheet pattens & check each sheet using the < > buttons.
    • Click on NC Code & Lables.

    Add files to output data

    • Click on P: Drive - Click on the 3 dots - Double click on the delivery month - double click on the job name - Click on the colour board folder - Click OK.
    • Repeat the same steps by clicking on the 3 dots for Label - IT & Label Images. When done - Click run & wait - Click close - OK - Print the colour board sheets.
    • Click on the Return button & repeat all steps above for the whiteboard by starting from (Click on filter parts) - Under “Parts Screen”.
    • When finished click on the return button to continue to “Rail List”

    Rail List

    • Click on filter parts - Materials - Click on rails - OK.
    • Click on Nest - Run - Click OK.
    • Click on Reports - Click on Rail List - Print - Click on the Return button.

    Paperwork for Factory

    • Click on pre production list & find job.
    • Click on the Green Accept button - Click on the date highlighted blue.
    • Click on the Job Detail Report in COL Pre production & tick the PP Box for all of the cabinets including (Boxed for delivery)
    • Click on the Production Report tab - Print out paperwork.
    • File paperwork in project file.

  • All Jobs with digital drawings supplied from customers must have their Job Updated to the LOCAL database.
    Utilities > Update Job > Tick All > OK

  • Base Cabinets

  • Tall Cabinets

  • Wall Cabinets

  • Roller Shutter Cabinet

    • Check sizing of cabinet to order.
    • Check for Construction Requirements.
      • Roller Shutter Opening & Frame.
    • Check Shelving.
      • No. of Shelf Pins, No. of Shelf Pin Columns, Shelf Pin Positioning, Adjustable Shelf Depth.
    • Check Reveals.
      • Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets.

  • Wine Rack

  • Glass Shelves

    • Open Cabinet in Section View
      • Click Section Interior
      • Select Shelf > Under Type Heading > Glass Adj Shelf
    • Open End View
      • Select Glass Adj Shelf
      • Under Attributes Heading > Drill - Pin Distance Below Shelf > Adjust Value so that Centre Shelf Pin, is positioned on the glass shelf (Approx Value: -3)

  • Reveals

    Changing Reveals on cabinets allow Doors/Drawers to function properly, and creates uniform gaps between Fronts.

    • Open cabinet in Cabinet Level
    • Open Section View and open Reveals from the Properties Menu Ribbon
    • Changing the Values within the Reveals will change the gaps on the cabinet
      • Top creates a reveal on the top side of the cabinet front. Indicated in Yellow
        • E.g. a Value of 3 creates a 3mm reveal on the top.
      • Bottom creates a reveal on the bottom side of the cabinet front. Indicated in Green
        • E.g. a Value of 3 creates a 3mm reveal on the bottom.
      • Left creates a reveal on the left side of the cabinet front. Indicated in Red
        • E.g. a Value of 1 will create a 1mm reveal on the left.
      • Right creates a reveal on the right side of the cabinet front. Indicated in Orange
        • E.g. a Value of 1 will create a 1mm reveal on the right.
      • Horizontal determines the width of the horizontal gaps between drawers/doors. Indicated in Purple
        • E.g. a Value of 3 will create a 3mm gap between each drawer/door.
      • Vertical determines the width of the vertical gaps between drawers/doors. Indicated in Blue
        • E.g. a Value of 2 will create a 2mm gap between each drawer/door.
    • Click OK to confirm changes

    <img class="embeddedObject" src="http://content.screencast.com/users/Cabinets_Online/folders/Default/media/eb2e84a0-dfd9-4325-a334-f45e355b058f/Reveals%20Diagram.png" width="421" height="655" border="0" /></a>

  • Vertical Rail

    Vertical Rails are used in Sink Cabinets or when a Horizontal Rail obstructs Appliances.

    • Select cabinet in Room Level or open in Cabinet Level
    • Change Top Rail (Vertical) Value, on the Side Menu Bar
      • True: Will create a Vertical Rail
      • False: Will crate a Horizontal Rail (Standard)
    Vertical Rail, Sink Cabinet, Rail Direction, Rail Orientation, Sink Rail

  • Back Scribe

    Back Scribe adds a void to the back of the Cabinet which is included in the overall depth measurement.

    • Select cabinet in Room Level or open in Cabinet Level
    • Change Back (Scribe) Value, on the Side Menu Bar
      • E.g. Value: 16, will add a 16mm (Standard) void to the back.
    Back Scribe, Back Void

  • Bottom Scribe

    Bottom Scribe adds a void to the bottom of the Wall Cabinet which is included in the overall height measurement.

    • Select cabinet in Room Level or open in Cabinet Level
    • Change Bottom Scribe Value, on the Side Bar Menu
      • E.g. Value: 17, will add a 17mm (Standard) void to the bottom.
    Bottom Scribe, Bottom Void, Underpanel, Under Panel

  • Finger Pull

    Adjust the Depth of the Wall Cabinet Bottom to allow for Finger Pull Doors.

    • Select cabinet in Room Level or open in Cabinet Level
    • Change Bottom (Fingerpull Adjust) Value, on the Side Bar Menu
      • E.g. Value: 16, will add a 16mm (Standard) gap to the front of the Cabinet Bottom.
    Finger Pull, Fingerpull

  • Solid Top Base Cabinet

    Change a Base Cabinet to Solid Top construction.

    • Open cabinet in Cabinet Level
    • Open Section View and open Case from the Properties Menu Ribbon
    • Select the Full Top tick-box
    • Click OK
    Full Top, Hard Top, Full Case

  • False Bottom

    False Bottoms are added to Wall Cabinets for LED Lighting or an optional addition for Finger Pull.

    • Open cabinet in Cabinet Level
    • Open Section Interior View
    • Add a Horizontal Split into the bottom space
    • Select and change new Horizontal Split to Fixed Shelf on the Side Menu Bar
    • Position the Fixed Shelf directly above the bottom
      • Method 1: Select and drag the Fixed Shelf into contact with the Bottom
      • Method 2: Select the space between the Fixed Shelf and Bottom, and change the Height value, on the Side Menu Bar to 0
    • Equalize Height on remaining spaces
      • Right-click and select Equalize Height on each space

    If Fixed Shelf is supplied loose:

    • Open Face View
    • Select Fixed Shelf
    • On the Side Menu Bar under the Attributes heading, change the following values:
      • Edge WP - Back 1: 0
      • Edge WP - Left: 0
      • Edge WP - Right: 0
    False Bottom, Second Bottom, Fixed Shelf, Finger Pull, Fingerpull, LED Lighting, Down Lights

  • Number Of Adjustable Holes

    Change how many Shelf Pin Holes each Adjustable Shelf has in a cabinet.

    • Select cabinet in Room Level or open in Cabinet Level
    • Change Number of Adjustable Holes Value, on the Menu Side Bar
      • E.g. Value: 3, will give each Adjustable Shelf, 3 Holes (Standard).
    Adjustable Shelf Holes, Shelf Pins,Shelf Pin Holes, More Shelf Holes,Add Shelf Holes

  • TZ20 Block

    Add/Remove/Change where a TZ20 is used on a cabinet.

    • Select cabinet in Room Level or open in Cabinet Level
    • Change TZ20 Block (Options Menu) Value, on the Side Menu Bar
      • Changing the value to True will give you new options.
        • TZ20 Block (Back)
        • TZ20 Block (Front Rail)
        • TZ20 Block (Left Gable)
        • TZ20 Block (Right Gable)
          • True: Will add a TZ20 Block (Standard on Base Cabinet Backs)
          • False: Will remove a TZ20 Block
    Benchtop Fixing, Bench Top Fixing, Benchtop Anchor

  • Rehinging

    Change the orientation of a Hinged Door left/right.

    • Select cabinet in Room Level
    • Right-click the cabinet
    • Select Rehinge

  • Moving a Hinge

    Move a Hinge up/down on a Door

    • Select cabinet and open in Cabinet Level
    • In Face View or End View, select the hinge
    • Change Up/Down (Y), Value on the Side Menu Bar
    • Add/Subtract from Value to move Hinge. Current Value(+/-)Value = New Position
      • E.g. 1. Current Value: 180. Type 180+100 in Value Entry, press enter. New Value: 280
      • E.g. 2. Current Value: 240. Type 240-60 in Value Entry, press enter. New Value: 180

  • Drawer Depth

    Change the depth of Drawers manually.

    • Open cabinet in Cabinet Level
    • In Section Face View select a Drawer Front
    • Change Box Depth Value, from the drop-down, on the Side Menu Bar
    Drawer Runner Depth, Drawer Hardware Depth, Change Depth of Drawer

  • Drawer Height

    Change the height of Drawers manually.

    • Open cabinet in Cabinet Level
    • In Section Face View select a Drawer
    • Change Height Value, under the Dimensions heading, on the Side Menu Bar
      • Reveals must be considered when changing value.
      • E.g. 250 drawer must be entered as 247, with 3 Horizontal/Top reveal

  • Edgebanding

    Change the edged sides on a selected part

    • Open cabinet or part in Cabinet Level
    • Open Face View/Plan View/End View (Select the view that will show a face view of the part to edit)
    • Right-click and select Edge Banding on part to edit
    • Add/Remove Edgebanding as necessary
      • Under Banding heading:
        • None: Acts as a remove option
        • Interior Banding (Yellow): Adds Interior Coloured Banding
        • Exterior Banding (Red): Adds Exterior Coloured Banding
        • Door Banding (Blue): Adds Door Coloured Banding
          • Select a Banding Option
          • Click the edge to be banded

  • Exposed Interior

    Change a cabinets construction material to Exposed Interior Colour.

    • Open cabinet in Cabinet Level
    • Open Section View and open Case from the Properties Menu Ribbon
    • Select the Exposed Interior tick-box
    • Click OK
    Colour Interior, Colour Construction, Colour Cabinet, Colour Inside

  • Bi-fold Doors

    Create Bi-fold Hinged Doors on a Cabinet

    • Open Cabinet in Cabinet Edit
      • Right-click, select Edit. Alternatively Double-click.
    • Split Door Vertically
      • Select Door in Section Face View
      • Click Vertical Split in Section Menu Ribbon
    • Change Hinge Orientation on Bi-fold Leaf Door
      • Select Bi-fold Leaf Door in Section Face View
      • Change Hinge Value on the Side Menu Bar
    • Change Bi-fold Door Hinge Type to Bi-fold Door Cup Hinge
      • Right-click Bi-fold Leaf Door, select Properties
      • Open Hinges Tab
      • Click Change Button, under Hinge Type
      • In Select A Material Window, open Hinges Tab
      • Select Bi-fold Door Cup Hinge
      • Click OK
    • Add Wingline Runner Drilling
      • Select Bi-Fold Leaf Door in Face View
      • Change Drill For Wingline Runner Value from the drop down menu, on the Side Menu Bar
        • False: Removes 780 Wingline Runner Drilling
        • True: Adds 780 Wingline Runner Drilling
          • Drill For 230 Cup
            • True: Changes 780 Wingline Runner Drilling to 230 Wingline Runner Drilling
            • False: Changes 230 Wingline Runner Drilling to 780 Wingline Runner Drilling
          • Drill For 770 Cup
            • True: Changes 780 Wingline Runner Drilling to 770 Wingline Runner Drilling
            • False: Changes 770 Wingline Runner Drilling to 780 Wingline Runner Drilling
          • Top Overlay
            • Value:16 (Standard)
            • Value:0 (No Top Cabinet)
    Bifold, Folding Door

  • Return Panel Adjustable Shelf

    Change an Adjustable Shelf in a Return Cabinet, to be in the return side.

    • Open cabinet in Cabinet Level
    • Select the Adjustable Shelf in Face View
    • On the Side Bar Menu, under the Attributes heading, change the following values:
      • AP-1 Parametric Adjustment: True
      • AP-5 Length: Current Value -(sum width of doors)
        • 0 (Current Value) - 750 (Sum width of doors) = -750 (New Value)

    If cabinet is right-hand return:

    • Change Left/Right (x), Value on the Side Menu Bar
      • Add AP-5 Length Value to Current Value
        • 17.5 (Current Value) + 750 (AP-5 Length Value) = 767.5 (New Value)

    Correcting Shelf Pin Boring:

    • On the Side Bar Menu, under the Attributes heading, change the following values:
      • Back 1 - Edit Drilling: True
      • Back 1 - No. of Columns: 2
        • Adds a second column of Shelf Holes
      • Back 1 - Equalize Columns: False
      • Edge WP - Back 2: 2
      • Back 2 - Edit Drilling: True
      • Back 2 - No. of Columns: 2
        • Adds a second column of Shelf Holes
      • Back 2 - Equalize Columns: False
      • Back 2 - Z: 2
        • This is to compensate for the Blind Panel Offset
    • Correct Adjustable Shelf Edgebanding

  • Single Void Corner Cabinets

    Add a void to one back of a Corner Cabinet, while having no void on the opposite back.
    Adding Void to True Back

    • Select cabinet in Room Level
    • Change Back (Scribe) Value, on the Side Menu Bar, to: 0
    • On the Side Bar Menu, change the following values:
      • Under the Dimensions heading, Depth: Current Value subtract Desired Void (16mm Standard)
        • E.g. 900 (Depth) - 16 (Void) = 884 (New Depth)
      • Under Position heading, Outset: Change Value to Desired Void (16mm Standard)
        • E.g. 0 (Outset) + 16 (Void) = 16 (New Outset)
      • Under Attributes heading, Depth 2: Change Value to adjacent cabinet depth - Desired Void
        • E.g. 560 (Cabinet Depth) - 16 (Void) = 544 (Same actual dimension as 560 cabinet with 16mm scribe)

    Adding Void to Second Back

    • Select cabinet in Room Level
    • Change Back (Scribe) Value, on the Side Menu Bar, to: 0
    • On the Side Bar Menu, change the following values:
      • Under the Dimensions heading, Width: Current Value subtract Desired Void (16mm Standard)
        • E.g. 900 (Width) - 16 (Void) = 884 (New Depth)
      • Under Clearance heading, Left: Change Value to Desired Void (16mm Standard)
        • E.g. 0 (Clearance) + 16 (Void) = 16 (New Clearance)
      • Under Attributes heading, Depth 1: Change Value to adjacent cabinet depth - Desired Void
        • E.g. 560 (Cabinet Depth) - 16 (Void) = 544 (Same actual dimension as 560 cabinet with 16mm scribe)

  • Changing Cabinet Construction

    • Select cabinet at Room Level
    • Open up Properties
    • Select Construction
    • Select cabinet construction required eg Captive Gable
    • Select Joints ( Reset Intelli-Joints) to True

  • Moving draws in the carcase

    • Select cabinet at Room level
    • Select Section view
    • Select Drawer (Options Menu) and change to True
    • Click on the face of the drawer that you need to adjust.
    • Click on Clearances and adjust by changing via top or bottom measurements.

  • Grain Matching

    • Select Elevation
    • Select the cabinet you need to grain match
    • Select Grain Match
    • Right click on the cabinet and select create a group.

  • Adding Hinges

    Add hinges to Doors where extra support is needed.

    • Open Cabinet in Cabinet Edit
    • Select Section view
    • Right-click selected Door
    • Select Properties
    • Open Hinges tab
    • Change Quantity to desired amount

  • Accept Job First
    Click on the green accept button - Click on the date highlighted blue.

    Producing the plans
    Click on the drawings tab.
    Create 2 sheets for printing.Click on new sheet Icon.
    Right click on the Plan or elevation - Click on (To Drawing)
    Click on reports for Cabinet report - Right click under the report - (To Drawings)
    Place the plan & cabinet report on one page.
    Place elevations on one page.Click on & drag over to page.
    Printer will print both the elevation & the plan in one print.
    Print 2 copys - Laminate 1 copy & staple the other in the file.
    Close & reopen the program after printing the plans to stop the program crashing.
    .
    .

    Click on the Screen To Machine Icon (Above drawings)
    Click on the Windows/File Explorer (bottom of screen)
    Choose P: Drive - Double click on the month that the job is due for delivery.
    Click on ( New Folder ) Copy & paste or type in job number & name in the folder.
    Double click on the folders icon.
    Click on new folder - Paste or type in the job number, name & colour.
    Click on new folder - Paste or type in the job number,name & whiteboard.

    S2M

    Click on Filter parts - Materials - Tick on coloured board - Click OK.
Click on Nest - Run - Click OK.
Click on sheet pattens & check each sheet using the < > buttons.
Click on NC Code & Lables.

    Add files to output data

    Click on P: Drive - Click on the 3 dots - Double click on the delivery month - double click on the job name - Click on the colour board folder - Click OK.
Repeat the same steps by clicking on the 3 dots for Label - IT & Label Images. When done - Click run & wait - Click close - OK - Print the colour board sheets.
Click on the Return button & repeat all steps above for the whiteboard by starting from (Click on filter parts) - Under “Parts Screen”.
When finished click on the return button to continue to “Rail List”

    Rail List

    Click on filter parts - Materials - Click on rails - OK.
Click on Nest - Run - Click OK.
Click on Reports - Click on Rail List - Print - Click on the Return button.

    Paperwork for Factory

    Click on pre production list & find job.
Click on the Job Detail Report in COL Pre production & tick the PP Box for all of the cabinets including (Boxed for delivery)
Click on the Production Report tab - Print out paperwork.
File paperwork in project file.
    • Run Alphacam V7.5
    • Click Select Post
    • Searching (Y:) Drive
    • Open NC Center Data
    • Open Post
    • Open Anderson - Stratos
    • Select & Open Intelli-CAM - Tekcel K Series
    • Searching (P:) Drive to find Current Job
    • Open Month/Year Folder of the Jobs EDD (Estimated Delivery Date)
    • Open Job Master Folder
    • Open Job Colour Folder
    • Open an Alphacam Router Drawing file
      • Suggested to open files in order
    • Click Open
    • Click Hide All under Operations
    • Scroll and Tick the Master Tick-box for the first Finish Pass commands
    • Click Machine drop-down
    • Highlight Edit Machining drop-down
    • Click Tool Path Data
      • This opens EDIT TOOL PATHS Menu at the bottom of the screen
    • Click All
    • Right Click the drawing
      • This opens the Rough/Finish Menu
    • Under Z Levels enter the current value into the Final Depth value box
    • Click OK
      • The second Menu Window will pop-up
    • Click OK
    • Right Click the Drawing
      • This will close the EDIT TOOL PATHS Menu
    • Click Show ALL under Operations
    • Click Save
      • Accept the prompted overwrite
    • Click Output NC save as current file name
      • Accept prompted overwrite

  • Drawer Heights

    Metabox - Measured from the bottom of the drawer.
    N = 54mm

    M = 86mm

    K = 118mm

    H = 150mm

    Antaro - Measured from the bottom of the drawer.

    N = 69mm

    M = 84mm

    B = 135mm

    C = 167mm

    D = 199mm

    Innotech - Measured from the top of the bottom.

    N = 54mm

    M = 66mm

    B = 144m

    D = 176mm

    Nova Pro - Measured from the bottom of the drawer.

    NP 67 = 57mm

    NP 90 = 84mm

    NP 122 = 116mm

    NP 90/67 Slide = 151mm

    NP 90/96 Slide = 183mm

    NP 122/67 Slide = 183mm

  • Aventos

    HK

    • Minimum Carcase Depth: 277.5 (261 Internal).
      • Add 17mm onto depth for Servo
    • Clearance Between Top Shelf and Top of Cabinet:
      3 Pin: 236 (220 Internal)
      5 Pin: 268 (252 Internal)

    HF

    • Minimum Carcase Depth: 294.5 (278 Internal)
    • Shelves must sit back 25mm from front of cabinet
    • Clearance between Internal Top of Cabinet and Top Shelf (SC)
      For 3 Pin Shelf: SC = MH + 42
      For 5 Pin Shelf: SC = MH + 74
      • Distance between Internal Top of cabinet and Bottom of Mechanism (MH)
        MH = KH(480 to 549) x 0.3 - 28 + 72.5
        MH = KH(550 to 1040) x 0.3 - 57 + 72.5
        Overall Cabinet Height (KH)

    HL

    • Minimum Carcase Depth: 294.5 (278 Internal)
    • Shelves must sit back 56mm from front of cabinet
    • Clearance Between Top Shelf and Top of Cabinet:
      3 Pin: 222 (206 Internal)
      5 Pin: 254 (238 Internal)

  • COL Glass Doors

    COL door glass\shelves - polished all round

    Glass Size - 110 minus off the height and width for glass size

    Polytec

    Polytec door glass- straight cut edges/5 cent corners.

    Glass Size - 118 minus off the height and width for glass size

    Cammeray Style Doors - 106 minus off the height and width for glass size

  • Corners opening on Pantry panels

    If door is hinged on a pantry panel it will not open properly, contact customer.

    SOLUTION: Re hinge to other side of cabinet

  • Inner Drawers on walls

    If a pantry has inner drawers and is situated on a wall, this cabinet will not work, as the doors will not open enough for the inner drawers and the customer must be contacted.

    SOLUTION: Use face filler wide enough for handle

  • Corner Pantry Shelves

    When the widths of the pantry are not the same size, the shelves will adjust to the left hand width

    SOLUTION: You have to adjust the right shelves to the desired length of the cabinet

  • Shallow Depth Shelves in Pantries

    When a cabinet is under 540mm deep, shallow shelves become impractical to use as there is no room for pantry objects to fit in.

    SOLUTION: Customer must be called and told shallow shelves will not work. Suggest full depth shelves

  • Handle less Drawer Fronts

    When a handle less drawer front is below 147mm in height (standard measurement), issues become apparent with the drawer hardware sticking up over into the handle less rail area.

    SOLUTION: Customer must be called and advised of the issue and asked if they want it ‘Absolute referenced’ or change the drawer front height.

  • Job moves to Preproduction -> Setout staff member selects most appropriate job to start processing.

  • Board Deliveries

  • Hardware Deliveries

  • Polytec Manufactured Doors

  • Hardware Boxing

  • Local Delivey

  • Interstate

  • International

    • Check Compressor Unit is in Standard Working Order
    • Check Extractor System is in Standard Working Order
    • Clean the fenced area
    • Check Coolant levels

  • Step 1 @ CNC Console

  • Step 2 @ Labeling Console

  • Step 3 @ CNC Console

    • Turn Mode Dial to Home
    • Press +Z Button
      • Machine will automatically calibrate each axis
    • -X, +Y, +Z Buttons will illuminate when calibrated
    • Turn Mode Dial to DNC
    • Run Campro DNC program on desktop
    • Click User File
    • Select & Open Tool Confirm File
    • Click Transfer
    • Tool 1 must be facing Spindle Head
      • If Tool 1 is not facing the Spindle Head. Refer to Manually Changing Tools
    • Press Cycle Start Button
      • Machine will confirm that the Tools are in the correct position
    • Manually Lower Scissor Lift to the lowest position
    • Load Pack onto Scissor Lift
      • 3600 x 1800 Sheets are to be loaded on Scissor Lift 1
      • 2400 x 1200 Sheets are to be loaded on Scissor Lift 2
      • Perform an X Reference Detect if necessary
      • 3100 x 1200 Sheets are to be loaded on Scissor Lift 2
      • Perform an X Reference Detect if necessary
      • Packs must be loaded square with the guides
      • Packs must be on a 16mm coversheet
      • Packs must not exceed height limit of 560mm
        • 34 Sheets of 16mm + Coversheet
        • 30 Sheets of 18mm + Coversheet
    • Press AUTO on Scissor Lift Control
    • Press ON, on the Photoelectric Barrier
      • Scissor Lift will automatically raise itself to the correct position

    Scissor Lifts will automatically lower when the last sheet has been removed from the pack & only the coversheet remains.
    The AUTO Button on the Scissor Lift Control, along with the ON Button, on the Photoelectric Barriers must be active for the Loading Machine to operate.

  • Pre-Operation Checklist

  • Running Jobs with Labels

  • Running Jobs without Labels

  • Pausing the Machine

  • Resuming the Machine

  • Step 1 @ Labeling Console

  • Step 2 @ CNC Console

    • Turn Mode Dial to DNC
    • Run Campro DNC program
    • Click User File
    • Select & Load Tool Unload File
    • Click Transfer
    • Press Cycle Start Button
      • Machine will unload current tool, and park the Machine Head in the center
    • Campro DNC will alert the operator when complete
    • Turn Mode Dial to DNC
    • Run Campro DNC program
    • Click User File
    • Select & Load Table Trim File
    • Click Transfer
    • Set Feed Rate to 100
    • Press Cycle Start Button
      • No Material should be on the Spoil Board during this process
      • Machine will now trim the Spoil Board .25mm
    • Campro DNC will alert Operator when complete
    • Turn Mode Dial to DNC
    • Run Campro DNC program
    • Click User File
    • Select & Load AUTO MEASURE # File
      • E.g. 101 is Tool 1, 102 is Tool 2 etc.
    • Click Transfer
    • Set Feed Rate to 50
    • Press Cycle Start Button
      • Machine will travel to Touch Off Plate & touch once
    • Press Cycle Start Button
      • Machine will now touch off a second time
    • Campro DNC will alert Operator when complete
    • Manually Calibrate the Machine
      • Refer to Calibrating the Machine
    • Open CNC Screen Display Function
    • Click OFST
    • Click # of desired Tool
      • E.g. 101 is Tool 1 , 102 is Tool 2 etc.
    • Click (OPRT)
    • Type Adjust Value in mm
      • E.g. to adjust Tool down 0.25mm: -0.25
      • E.g. to adjust Tool up 0.25mm: 0.25
    • Click +Input
      • This will bring up a confirm option
    • Click Can to Cancel command. Click Exec to Execute command
    • Turn Mode Dial to JOG
    • Open Spindle Head Cover

  • Removing a Tool from the Spindle

  • Rotating & Loading the Tool Magazine

    • Close Spindle Head Cover
    • Press Purple Reset Button

  • Opening the Program & Job

  • To print a specific label

  • To print labels for a specific sheet

  • Loading a 3600 x 1800 sheet from Scissor Lift 1

  • Loading a 2400 x 1200 sheet from Scissor Lift 2

  • Loading a 3100 x 1200 sheet from Scissor Lift 2

  • When loading the Scissor Lifts with a different length of board, an X Reference Detect must be performed.

    • Open Campro DNC
    • Under Material Length change the value on the drop down menu for the desired area
      • Area 1 will change Scissor Lift 1, Area 2 will change Scissor Lift 2
    • Open vncviewer or at the Labeling Control select the Scissor Lift you wish to modify by selecting Area 1 or Area 2
    • Under the Home Shift heading, Click Change
    • Click X Reference Detect
      • Machine will locate the material
    • Remove any debris/offcuts/scrap from the machine area
    • Excessive amounts of dust are swept up
    • All unnecessary objects are removed from the general area
    • Check Coolant levels on Cooling Machine

  • Incorporate the Daily Maintenance & the following:

  • Spindle Head

  • Drill Component

  • Vacuum Pumps

  • Labeling/Loading Head

  • Guide Rails

  • Scissor Lifts

  • Coolant Machine

  • CNC Console

  • Pop-Up Pins

  • Incorporate the Daily Maintenance, Weekly/Fortnightly Maintenance & the following:

  • Track Treads

  • Conveyor Lifts

  • Loader Head Suction Cups

  • Incorporate the Daily Maintenance, Weekly/Fortnightly Maintenance, Monthly Maintenance & the following:

  • Vacuum Pumps

  • Incorporate the Daily Maintenance, Weekly/Fortnightly Maintenance, Monthly Maintenance, Quarterly Maintenance & the following:

  • Carbon Vanes

  • Vacuum Pumps

  • Updating Labelling Control

  • Updating Campro DNC

  • The Optic Beam on the Photoelectric Barriers have been tripped.
    This is a safety precaution and will not cause severe interruptions.

    Reset the Optic Beam by pressing the ON Button, on the Photoelectric Barriers

  • The Loading Machine has attempted to lift material off a Scissor Lift but failed. The Material Presence Sensor has detected that no material was lifted and paused the process.

    To fix the problem, turn ON Vacuum Pumps and click Resume on vncviewer

  • The Network Connection between VNC Console & CNC Console has been lost.

    • Refer to Shutting Down the Machine
    • Refer to Starting Up the Machine

  • The Labeling System cannot access the database.

    • Close Campro DNC
    • Close Labeling Control
      • Allow 30 second reset
    • Open Labeling Control
    • Click Home
    • Refer to Running a Job

  • Internal Printer Error, label may have become jammed internally.

    • Open Labeling Control
    • Click Service Position
    • Open Labeling Machine
    • Setup the Sticker Roll
    • Click Home on Labeling Control

  • Two causes can trigger this alarm.

    • The Ink Ribbon has run out & needs replacing
    • The tail on the Label Roll has jammed
      • Rewind the Label Roll & thread it properly

  • 2100 (2000) (A0.0) SPINDLE UP SENSOR ALARM

  • 2101 (2001) (A0.1) COVER LOCK ALARM

  • 2102 (2002) (A0.2) Z AXIS ZERO RETURN

  • 2103 (2003) (A0.3) SAFETY BARRIERS ALARM

  • 2104 (2004) (A0.4) OMLET MOTOR PROBE SENSOR ALARM

  • 2105 (2005) (A0.5) #1 PMM SERVO DRIVER NOT READY

  • 2106 (2006) (A0.6) SKIP SIGNAL ALARM

  • 2107 (2007) (A0.7) THERMO OF INVERTER BRAKE

  • 2110 (2010) (A1.0) #1 SP T.C. NOT COMPLETE

  • 2111 (2011) (A1.1) #2 VACUUM PRESSURE ALARM

  • 2112 (2012) (A1.2) #1 VACUUM PRESSURE ALARM

  • 2113 (2013) (A1.3) INVERTER ALARM

  • 2114 (2014) (A1.4) OVERLOAD ALARM

  • 2115 (2015) (A1.5) OIL AND LUBE ALARM

  • 2116 (2016) (A1.6) AIR PRESSURE ALARM

  • 2117 (2017) (A1.7) Z AXIS STOPPER SENSOR ALARM

  • 2120 (2020) (A2.0) # 1 SPINDLE TOOL CLAMP UP SENSOR

  • 2121 (2021) (A2.1) #1 TM FORWARD SENSOR

  • 2122 (2022) (A2.2) #1 TM BACKWARD SENSOR

  • 2123 (2023) (A2.3) TM UP SENSOR

  • 2124 (2024) (A2.4) TM DOWN SENSOR

  • 2125 (2025) (A2.5) TM COUNTER SENSOR(OPTIONAL)

  • 2126 (2026) (A2.6) TM SENSOR alarm

  • 2127 (2027) (A2.7) #1 TOOL NUMBER INCORRECT

  • 2130 (2030) (A3.0) #1 T.C. ALARM

  • 2131 (2031) (A3.1) #1 TM ROTATE NOT COMPLETE

  • 2132 (2032) (A3.2) #1 TOOL NUMBER MUST PRESET

  • 2133 (2033) (A3.3) #1 SPINDLE STOP DELAY

  • 2134 (2034) (A3.4) #1 SPINDLE UP SENSOR ALARM

  • 2135 (2035) (A3.5) #1 SPINDLE BRUSH UP SENSOR

  • 2136 (2036) (A3.6) #1 SP. TOOL CLAMP DOWN SENSOR

  • 2137 (2037) (A3.7) Z HOME OR Z CONFIRM ERROR

  • 2140 (2040 (A4.0) SAW 0 DEGREE SENSOR ALARM(OPTIONAL)

  • 2141 (2041) (A4.1) SAW 90 DEGREE SENSOR ALARM(OPTIONAL)

  • 2142 (2042) (A4.2) Y HOME OR Y CONFIRM ERROR

  • 2143 (2043) (A4.3) DUST PIPE SENSOR ALARM

  • 2144 (2044) (A4.4) COOLING SYSTEM ALARM

  • 2145 (2045) (A4.5) #1 T.M. OPEN SENSOR(OPTIONAL)

  • 2146 (2046) (A4.6) SP. SPEED REACH ALARM

  • 2147 (2047) (A4.7) REMOTE BOX ENABLE

  • 2150 (2050) (A5.0) #2 SPINDLE UP SENSOR ALARM

  • 2151 (2051) (A5.1) VACUUM CLAMP BEING OFF

  • 2152 (2052) (A5.2) #2 PMM SERVO DRIVER NOT READY

  • 2153 (2053) (A5.3) PMM AXIS ALARM(OPTIONAL)

  • 2154 (2054) (A5.4) #2 TM ROTATE NOT COMPLETE

  • 2155 (2055) (A5.5) #2 TM FORWARD SENSOR

  • 2156 (2056) (A5.6) #2 TM BACKWARD SENSOR

  • 2157 (2057) (A5.7) #2 TM SENSOR ALARM

  • 2160 (2060) (A6.0) OFF-LOADING DEVICE UP SENSOR

  • 2161 (2061) (A6.1) CRASHPROOF ALARM (1)

  • 2162 (2062) (A6.2) LIFTING MOTOR OVERLOAD (1)

  • 2163 (2063) (A6.3) CONVEYER STOP MESSAGE

  • 2164 (2064) (A6.4) CONVEYER INVERTER ALARM

  • 2165 (2065) (A6.5) SAFETY POSITION ERROR

  • 2166 (2066) (A6.6) CONVEYER MOTOR OVERLOAD

  • 2167 (2067 (A6.7)LIFTING MOTOR OVERLOAD (2)

  • 2170 (2070) (A7.0) FENCE DOWN SENSOR ALARM

  • 2171 (2071) (A7.1) AXIS GREASE LUBE ALARM

  • 2172 (2072) (A7.2) #1 SPINDLE DOWN SENSOR ALARM

  • 2173 (2073) (A7.3) CRASHPROOF ALARM (2)

  • 2176 (2076) (A7.6) SAW NOT IN UP ALARM (OPTIONAL)

  • 2177 (2077) (A7.7) COVER CURTAIN UP SENSOR (OPTIONAL)

  • 2180 (2080) (A8.0) SAFETY DOOR OPEN

  • 2181 (2081) (A8.1) NO.2 SAFETY DOOR OPEN

  • 2182 (2082) (A8.2) CONVEYER TABLE DOWN ERROR

  • 2183 (2083) (A8.3) SAW UP SENSOR ALARM (OPTIONAL)

  • 2184 (2084) (A8.4) NO.1 X-END. SENSOR AL. (OPTIONAL)

  • 2185 (2085) (A8.5) NO.2 X-END. SENSOR AL. (OPTIONAL)

  • 2186 (2086) (A8.6) NO.3 X-END. SENSOR AL. (OPTIONAL)

  • 2187 (2087) (A8.7) NO.1 Y-END. SENSOR AL. (OPTIONAL)

    • Check Compressor Unit is in Standard Working Order
    • Check Extractor System is in Standard Working Order
    • Check Auto Return Unit switch is ON
    • Check Cleaning Agent & Lubricating Agent Containers are filled enough for the day ahead
    • Turn ON Main Isolator Switch
    • Turn ON Machine Power Switch
    • Allow On-board Computer to boot
      • Panel Lodge System will automatically run on start-up
    • Press Dialog
    • Press Log In
      • Log In with assigned User
    • Press Edgebander Operating Menu
    • Press CombiMelt Menu
    • Press Forward ON
      • This will start the process of heating the Glue Roller & Glue Pot. At correct temperature the Glue Roller will begin to operate
    • Close CombiMelt Menu
    • Next to Messages: Press Accept to clear current messages
    • Hold down ON button to lower Pressure Beam to assigned height
      • The ON button and the Pressure Beam Adjust will flash until height is adjusted
    • Allow Machine to auto adjust & prepare
      • The Warning Light will turn OFF when machine is ready to use
    • Load Edgetape
    • Adjust Pressure Beam Height
    • Turn ON RS Cleaning Unit
    • Open T30 Menu
    • Press ON Button
    • Select a Program on T30 Program Select
      • Feeding material into the Edgebander will operate under this Program until a different Program has been selected
      • Changing the Program on the fly will only affect material that is fed into the machine after the change. Material already in the machine will continue to run on the Program that was selected as it was fed into the Edgebander
        • This means that 4 different pieces of material in the machine can be under 4 different Programs
    • Feed Material into the Edgebander
      • The Warning Light will illuminate once the material is in the machine. This signifies that it is not yet safe to feed material into the machine. A Barrier Pin is attached to the Warning Light and will prevent any material from being fed into the machine while it is illuminated.
    • The material will exit the Edgebander & the Auto Return Unit will bring the material back to the operator
      • Narrow pieces often rest between Rollers & must be looked out for
      • If material is longer than 750mm and hangs over the front of the Auto Return Unit it will have to be manually guided.

  • The T30 Quick Select Menu is an on-screen button system that allows the operator to switch between pre-set modes with the tap of the screen.
    Each pre-set has a different function that allows the operator to efficiently edge the job, while minimizing any post-machining handling, such as filing or scraping.

    • 1mm STRAIGHT
      • 1mm Edge, premill, radius, flush ends
    • 1mm CORNER ROUND
      • 1mm Edge, premill, radius, rounded ends
        • Only to be used when both adjacent sides are edged
    • 1mm FRONT CORNER ROUND
      • 1mm Edge, premill, radius, rounded front end, flush back end
    • 1mm HINGE
      • 1mm Edge, premill, radius, flush ends
        • Hinge Cups must face down
    • 1mm CORNER HINGE
      • 1mm Edge, premill, top radius only, flush ends
        • Hinge Cups must face down
    • 1mm NO END SAWS
      • 1mm Edge, premill, raidus, uncut ends
        • Used on edges with angled ends
    • 1mm NO FRONT END SAW
      • 1mm Edge, premill, radius, uncut front edge, flush back edge
        • Used for handle-less gables and edges with one angled end
    • 2mm STRAIGHT
      • 2mm Edge, premill, radius, flush ends
    • 2mm CORNER ROUND
      • 2mm Edge, premill, radius, rounded ends
        • Only to be used when both adjacent sides are edged
    • 2mm FRONT CORNER ROUND
      • 2mm Edge, premill, radius, rounded front end, flush back end
    • 2mm HINGE
      • 2mm Edge, premill, radius, flush ends
        • Hinge Cups must face down
    • 2mm CORNER HINGE
      • 2mm Edge, premill, top radius only, flush ends
        • Hinge Cups must face down
    • 2mm NO END SAWS
      • 2mm Edge, premill, raidus, uncut ends
        • Used on edges with angled ends
    • 2mm NO FRONT END SAW
      • 2mm Edge, premill, radius, uncut front edge, flush back edge
        • Used for handle-less gables and edges with one angled end
    • Place the Edgetape on the Edgetape Table
      • Roll must be Counter-Clockwise
    • Release the Red Automatic Edge Adjust Switch
    • Thread the Edgetape through the Guide Roller and Guide Fence
    • Through the Automatic Edge Adjust Clamp
    • Through the Contact Pad
    • Under the Secondary Height Guide
      • Adjust guide to roughly 1mm of play
    • Through the Primary Height Guide
      • Adjust guide to 0.5mm of play
    • Feed Edgetape to the arrow opposite the Pressure Roller
    • Lock the Red Automatic Edge Adjust Switch
    • Open CombiMelt Menu
    • Press OFF
      • This will turn OFF the Glue Roller
    • Close Panel Lodge System
    • Turn OFF On-board Computer
      • Allow to completely turn OFF before completing next step
    • Turn OFF Machine Power Switch
    • Turn OFF Main Isolator Switch

  • To Clean the Glue Roller

  • To Replace the Glue

  • Manually Operating Pneumatic Components

  • Adjusting Spray Amount

    • Check Extractor System is in Standard Working Order
    • Press Emergency Stop Button
    • When cleaning under the Hood:
      • Open all Extractor Vents
      • Sweep or blow down components with compressed air
      • Sweep or blow all shavings, swarf & edge chips into the Extractor Vents
    • Blow down the entire Machine with compressed Air
      • Never blow dust towards the Glue Roller
      • Particular areas of the Machine:
        • Pressure Beam & Hoods
        • Roller Tracks
        • Edgebander Feed Belt
        • Auto Return Unit Motors
        • Feed Entrance & Exit
        • Feed Motor
      • Edgetape Magazine
    • Empty Scraper Deposits
      • Extractor System must be OFF in order to do this

  • There are different types of symbols that show up with each job to show a certain type of material.

    Outsourced: The Outsourced symbol is for vinyl doors and panels. These doors\panels have to be ordered with a 10 day lead time.

    Paint Brush: The paint brush symbol is for painted doors and panels. These doors\panels have to have a date set for pick up from the painter with a lead time of 15 days.

  • Provisional EDD

  • Job names should appropriately relate to the name of the customer.
    Inappropriate names include: Business of Origin or Street Addresses

  • Customer (Minimum Requirement)

    • Name (Minimum Requirement)
    • Address (Minimum Requirement)
    • Phone (Minimum Requirement)
    • Fax
    • Mobile
    • Email

  • Delivery Address

    • Only required when customer and delivery address are not the same. (E.g. Investment Property)

  • Delivery Contact

    • Only required if different to the delivery address contact. E.g. Installer

  • Show Map

    • Click link and confirm
    • Check for order instructions or changes

  • Name

  • Default Hardware Brands

  • Room Dimensions

  • Selective Pricing
    User level access

  • Instructions

  • Styles

    • ( * ) Indicates Default Styled Item
      • Default style only becomes relevant if two or more different colours or finishes are selected for the same styled-item.
    • Styled-items:
      • Door
      • Drawer Fronts
      • Panels
      • Open Cabinet Material
      • Kick - Melamine
      • Kicks - Laminated
      • Roller Shutter
      • Roller Shutter Frame
      • Bulkheads
      • Glass Insert
      • Glass Shelving
      • Capping
      • Paint
      • Edge
      • Pallet Skid
    • Confirm cabinet numbers match the drawing
    • Confirm all products height, width and depth match the drawing
    • Confirm all products match the drawing
      • E.g. Order item lists 3 drawer base. Drawing shows 2 drawers
    • Confirm if required, multiple styled items
    • Confirm specific kit sizing for products match drawing
      • E.g. drawer front heights

  • Door and Drawer reveals

    • Confirm all cabinets reveals

  • Counter Top

    This refers to the size of the bench top (20mm, 34mm, 40mm etc) ,which will determine the height of the cabinets below, in conjunction with the kicks

  • Base Interior

    This refers to the type and colour of the board you have selected for the interior colour of the base cabinets

  • Upper Interior

    Just like the base Interior, this refers to the upper cabinet colour and type of the interior

  • Base Exterior

    This refers to the type and colour of the board you have selected for the exterior colour of the base cabinets

  • Upper Exterior

    Just like the base exterior, this refers to the upper cabinet colour and type of the exterior

  • Layout

    Defines the general Overall dimensional restrictions how cabinetry works within the constraints of the walls in both Height and length.

    E.g

    • Wall height
    • Bulkhead Height
    • Default Filler width
    • Minimum distances cabinets pulled from
      • Windows
      • Door Ways
      • Return Cabinetry

  • Cabinet

    Defines the Overall Cabinetry dimensions.

    • Bench Top Height
    • Splash Back Height
    • Kick Height
    • All Default Cabinetry depths
    • Basic Cabinetry format
      • Doors
      • Qty & Type of shelving

  • Base Construction

    This refers to the starter construction type for all cabinetry that has KICKS

  • Upper Construction

    This refers to the starter construction type of the cabinets on the wall

  • Base Door

    This refers to the style of door for the base cabinets

  • Upper Door

    This refers to the style of door for the upper cabinets

  • Drawer

    Defines the Default Style requirement for the room

  • Drawer Box

    Defines the Default hardware brand requirements for the room

  • Pullout

    Defines the Default hardware brand requirements for the room

  • Base End Panel

    This refers to end panel types such as bar panels and panels that have specific edging eg. 1H2W

  • Upper End Panel

    See Base End Panel

  • 1mm\2mm - Size of the edge type

  • Thermo - Changes colour board doors\drawers to vinyl adjusting the sizes accordingly

  • Drawer type - This sets up your drawers for the kitchen eg. Metabox

  • Tops - Here you can change the size of the tops for the kitchen
    Example Template: 1mm + Thermo + Metabox + 20mm Top

    • (NS)
      NO SCRIBE
    • (FDS)
      FULL DEPTH SHELVES
    • (UBM)
      Under Bench Microwave

    • Base Cabinets

      • Check for Finished End Requirements.
        • Finished Ends are indicated by an F on the Elevation View.
        • Double click cabinet to Open Cabinet Modify
        • Select Left/Right Ends tab as required
        • Under End Type drop down, select required option.

      • Check sizing of cabinet to order

      • Check for Scribe Requirements.

      • Change Construction File to required setting.
      • Check shelving.
      • Check reveals.

    • Sink Cabinet

      • Check for Finished Ends.

      • Check sizing of cabinet to order.

      • Change Construction file to appropriate requirements.

      • Check for Scribe Requirements.

      • Check Reveals.

      • Check Shelving.

    • Drawer Cabinets

      • Check for Finished Ends.

      • Change Construction file to appropriate requirements.

      • Check for scribe requirements.

      • Check For Appliance Conflicts.

      • Check Drawer Heights.

      • Check Drawer Depths.

      • Check Drawer Hardware Kits.

      • Check Reveals.

    • Base Return Cabinets

      • Check for Finished Ends.
      • Check Hinging.
      • Change Construction file to appropriate requirements.
      • Check for Scribe Requirements.
      • Check Blind Panel Sizing.
      • Check Shelving.
      • Check Added Hardware suitability and correct selection.

    • 3 Door Base Corner Cabinets

      • Delete Cabinet Off Plan.
      • Click on - Lazy Susan Base - Bottom tool bar.
      • Enter sizes for cabinet in left & right hand fields.
      • Click into position on plan.
      • Repeat all steps below in Base Corner Cabinets.

    • Base Corner Cabinets

      • Check For Finished Ends.

      • Check Sizing of cabinet to order.

      • Change Construction file to appropriate requirements.

      • Check Hinging.

      • Check Reveals.

      • Check for Scribe Requirements.

      3 Door Only - Adjust Cut List IF a pair of doors are required - (Door Size & Quantity) - Half the door size & minus 1mm off each door.

      3 Door Only - Double click on end gable in Multi Cross Section and change the right hand gable side to Cnr End in part description - Always have door hinging set at Hinge Left in Section Modify under the Details tab.

      • Add ‘r’ to Right-hand back in cut list description - Go into cross section - Double click on right hand back - Add “r” in parts description -EG. - Cnr Backr

      • Shape Bottom to include Radius Corner - 18mm - Go into cross section - Click on bottom - Right click - Shape - Modify - Move to suit.

      • Adjust Shelf depth back by 60mm (70mm in Total) to clear Hinge and Daisy Catch - (As above)

      • Add 100mm internal Radius to Adjustable Shelf - (As above)

      • If Corner cabinet has a Void on one side and No Void on the other - use 3 base cabinet (NS) as construction file - Change measurements to suit in Cabinet Modify in Sizes 16mm off length & width - Bring the cabinet off the wall by 16mm on the void side - Type in 16mm in the Distance from wall field - This will align the front of the cabinets.Check to see that the cabinet next to the direction you are moving has not grown 16mm if so minus 16mm off the cabinet then move. If the cabinet does not align you should delete the cabinet off the plan & put in a new cabinet and type in the measurements in this way.

    • Base Servery Cabinet

      • As Base cabinets but use Servery Cabinet as construction file.

      • Check floor clearance & bottom reveal.

      • Check at filler panel next to cabinet is full length (Cabinet height + kick height)

    • Under Bench Oven Cabinet

      • Check for finished ends.

      • Change Height to suit.

      • Change Construction file to appropriate requirements.

      • Check oven opening size & panel height to suit.

      • Check Panel reveals.

    • Under Bench Mircowave Cabinet

      • Cabinet will need rebuilding.

      • Delete original item from drawing.

      Drawer Unit

      • Add Special Cabinet at required sizing.
      • Check Heights & Depth.
      • Change to required drawer configuration.
      • Check for Scribe Requirements.
      • Check Reveals.

      Microwave Box

      • Add Special Cabinet at required sizing - Check Heights & Depths.
      • ( Drawer Unit + 20mm) if not integrated.
      • Change Construction file to Open Shelf .
      • Change to Interior bottom.
      • Change Interior file to appropriate requirements.
      • If a scribe is required this will need to be done manually in - Cabinet Modify under - Sizes - adjust depth of cabinet to suit.

      http://screencast.com/t/bhBNOM3ZCduF

    • Base Angle End

      • Check sizing of cabinet.
      • Check left & right ends are (Applied)
      • Change construction file to Base Corner End (NS)
      • Minus 16mm off the left & right widths. E.G. 560mm to 544mm.
      • Minus 16mm off the left & right depths. E.G. 118mm to 102mm.
      • Move cabinet off wall & cabinet beside by 16mm to create void.
      • Go to left & right ends in cabinet modify and change rear adjustments to -16 to cover void.

      • Door reveals to be 16.45mm left & right & 3mm to top.

      • Check hinging.

      • Add “r” to right hand back.

    • Wine Rack & Open Shelf

      • Check for Finished Ends.
      • Check all Spacings are Equal.
      • If Spacings are NOT Equal - Delete all Internal spacings.
      • Click On Section Modify to add Verticals then Horizontals to suit.
      • Change Construction File to Open Shelf
      • Change Interior Colour to Suit Exterior Colour.
      • Check on Open Cabinet Material on paper work.

    • Suspended Vanities - No Back Scribe.

      • Check for Finished Ends.

      • Change to Interior Bottom

      • Change Construction file to (Vanities - Suspended)

      • Use W2 16mm White HMR 1mm PVC (SV) for Interior field.

      • Check Drawer Heights.

      • Check Drawer Depths.

      • Check Reveals.

    • Base Angle Corner Void

      • Use 1 Base Cabinet as construction file and 2 x No Ends, leave if panels are 16mm.
      • If panels are not 16mm adjust overall size to suit panel widths E.G. Add 2mm to each wall size if panels are 18mm.
      • Minus 2mm off each cabinet either side of the base angle corner void cabinet.
      • Standard 16mm panels = Wall size = 255mm - 16mm Void = 237mm.

    • Upper cabinets

      • Interior Bottom*
        Confirm Bottoms are set to Interior Bottom.
        Failure to do so will result in missing components and construction holes.

      http://screencast.com/t/WE9rttKldns

      • Change to Upper Cabinets in Construction File.
      • Check for Finished Ends.
      • Check Door Hinging.
      • Check Reveals.
      • Check Shelving.
      • If doors are glass change door style to suit material E.G 16mm melamine doors = COL Doors.

    • Slide-Out Rangehoods

      • Check for Finished Ends.
      • Change to Interior Bottom.
      • Change Construction File - Ducted or Recirculated
      • Check that the upper valance box is ticked in (Tops/Bots)
      • Change height of bottom valance to suit rangehood height - (Type measurement in the width field in cabinet modify under Tops/Bots tab)
      • Change the valance height first then the door height.
      • Change door height to suit front handle - (Type in the handle height + gap in the bottom field in section modify under Doors tab)
      • Check Door Hinging.
      • Check Reveals.
      • Check Shelving.

    • Wall Open Clipped End

      • Change to Unfinished Ends.
      • Change to Interior bottom.
      • Change construction file to - Open Clipped End 3mm PR
        Try open shelf
      • Check exterior & interior colours.
      • Confirm size of clipped end. (Click on Left Ends or Right Ends )
      • Delete Adjustable shelves & add fixed shelves via (Add Horizontal) - Top tool bar.
      • Change Measurements in multicross to equal - Shelves @ 322mm square & Side & back @ 340mm Over all.

    • Wall Corner Cabinet

      • Check for finished ends.
      • Check sizing to order.
      • Check hinging.
      • Change to interior bottom.
      • Change construction file to Upper Corner Cabinets * Check reveals.
      • Add ‘r’ to right-hand back in cut list description - (Same as in Base Corner Cabinets)
      • Shape top & bottom to include radius corner - 18mm - (Same as in Base Corner Cabinets)
      • Add 70mm internal radius to adjustable shelf.
        3 Door Only
      • Half the large door size & minus 1mm off each door & change the quantity to 2 doors. Do this first before going into multicross.
      • Use all the same steps as above but there is no need to delete the cabinet off the drawing. Add ‘Cnr End’ to right hand gable.

    • Fridge Cabinet

      • Check For Finished Ends.
      • Check Interior Bottom.
      • Change Construction File to Fridge Cabinet
      • Check Shelving.
      • Check Hinging.
      • Check Reveals.
      • Please note that this construction file defaults the hinge boring at 64mm not 96mm as standard.
      • Use 96mm hinge boring when using Aluminum glass doors in this cabinet as they are bored at 96mm.

    • Upper Microwave Cabinet

      • Cabinet will need rebuilding

      Microwave box

      • Check heights and Depths.
      • Change construction file to Microwave Upper
      • Change Interior material to colour board.
      • Confirm Bottom is set to Interior Bottom.
      • Remove top.
      • Make into open cabinet.

      • Remove shelves.

      • Add in horizontal Section.

      • Check height of microwave to set height of divider (MW height minus 32)
      • Go into Multicross and bring the microwave back down to level with the shelf and remove joints from either side that need biscuit ends.

      Door Unit

      • Move colour cabinet off wall (hold Ctrl+left mouse click)
      • Draw new upper cabinet into space.
      • Check Heights, widths and Depths (Cabinet must be 32mm smaller in width than colour cabinet and 20 less in depth)
      • Change construction file to 6.1 UPPER (Captive Gable).
      • Confirm Bottom is set to Interior Bottom.
      • Remove shelves if needed.
      • Set reveals (2 left, 2 right, 2 bottom)
      • Move colour cabinet back to fit around whiteboard cabinet.
      • Remove horizontal dimension.

      http://www.screencast.com/t/SAnK745DY

    • Wine Rack & Open Shelf

      • Check for Finished Ends.
      • Change Construction File to Open Shelf
      • Change to Interior bottom.
      • Change Interior Colour to Suit Exterior Colour.
      • Check on Open Cabinet Material.
      • Check all Spacings are Equal.
      • If Spacings are NOT Equal - Delete all Internal spacings.
      • Click On Section Modify to add Verticals then Horizontals to suit.
      • For wine racks do not count the top & bottom as a shelf.
      • Remove any cams from parts in open cabinets when processing the job.

    • Tambor Cabinets

      • Check for finished ends
      • Untick & Retick - No Bottom
      • Change construction file to Tambor Cabinets
      • Section Type - “Open’’

    • Appliance Cabinet

      • Check for finished ends.
      • Change construction file to Appliance Pantry
      • Check top scribe in multi-cross. Go to Tops/Bots & untick & retick No Bottom.

      • Change shelving to suit.

      • Use 5mm for reveal to bottom of doors.

    • Wingline Doors

      • Leave as Pair of doors under door hinging.
      • Remove the hinges from the left or right hand side of the cabinet to suit.
      • Remove hinge plate holes from gable in CNC when processing.
      • Go into multicross and click on the door.
      • Click on the hinge - Right click - Delete.
      • Check for cabinet conflicts

    • Pantry Cabinets

      Dashed Lines indicate Shallow depth shelves when used in combination with Horizontal dividers.
      At all other times they are full depth.

      • Check For Finished Ends.
      • Check for Scribe Requirements.
      • Check Construction File Requirements - See Available Options
      • Check Shelving Configuration.
      • Check for Inner Drawers - Check and adjust if needed in (Section Modify) - Pullouts Tab - Choose the runners that are required under (Hardware) tab in the (Pullout Slide) tab.
      • Check Reveals.
      • Check Hardware Suitability.
      • Check Hinging
      • Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts, Draw Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts

    • Return Pantry Cabinets (Kick Height)

      Front Colour Section

      • Change construction file to 1 Base Cabinet
      • Delete whiteboard cabinet - Go to Cabinet Modify - Remove left & right ends, back, top & bottom.( No Ends,No Back tick No Top & Bottom )
      • Move Cabinet off the Plan ( Click on the cabinet - using the control key move left or right of the plan.
      • Remove all the shelves ( Left & right click on the cabinet - Choose Partitions/Dividers - Click on the shelves & delete them )
      • Check all sizing to suit ( Click on - Lazy Susan Special - Bottom tool bar - Untick and add information to suit in special cabinet window.(Tick cabinet on floor to include kick.)
      • Add left & right lengths & depths to suit cabinet - Place cabinet onto plan.

      Whiteboard Section

      • Change construction file to Pantry (BC)(STD ADJ)(NS)
      • Check sizes so that depth of blind side allows the blind panel to protrude by at least 80mm. Make the other with approximately 300 for a 580 deep pantry.
      • Remove Shelves - Section Modify - Details - “0” Adjustable Shelves.
      • Add a fixed shelf - Section Modify - Click on Horizontal Divider top tool bar - Click on cabinet - Adjust height to suit.
      • Add the adjustable shelves - Section Modify - Details - Add the Quantity to the bottom section then to the top section.
      • Add “ r “ to right hand back.
      • Add 100mm Internal Radius to shelves. (Refer to Base Corner Cabinets)
      • Reset Shape of Top & Bottom
      • Edge front of top & bottom.
      • Extended Short Gable to match other Gable
      • Move cabinet back onto plan.
      • Check door reveals.
      • Re number white board cabinet & create 2 Numbers on the data base.

    • Return Pantry Cabinet (Walk - In)

      Front Colour Section

      • Change construction file to 1 Base Cabinet.
      • Delete whiteboard cabinet - Go to Cabinet Modify - Remove left & right ends, back, top & bottom.( No Ends,No Back tick No Top & Bottom )
      • Move Cabinet off the Plan ( Click on the cabinet - using the control key move left or right of the plan.
      • Remove all the shelves ( Left & right click on the cabinet - Choose Partitions/Dividers - Click on the shelves & delete them )
      • Check all sizing to suit ( Click on - Lazy Susan Special - Bottom tool bar - Untick and add information to suit in special cabinet window.(Tick cabinet on floor to include kick.)
      • Add left & right lengths & depths to suit cabinet - Place cabinet onto plan.

      Whiteboard Section

      • Change construction file to Pantry (BC)(STD ADJ)(NS)
      • Check sizes so that depth of blind side allows the blind panel to protrude by at least 80mm. Make the other with approximately 300 for a 580 deep pantry.
      • Remove Shelves - Section Modify - Details - “0” Adjustable Shelves.
      • Add a fixed shelf - Section Modify - Click on Horizontal Divider top tool bar - Click on cabinet - Adjust height to suit.
      • Add the adjustable shelves - Section Modify - Details - Add the Quantity to the bottom section then to the top section.
      • Add 16mm top scribe (Tops/Bots)
      • Duplicate top re shape square & edge front edge.
      • Add “ r “ to right hand back.
      • Add 100mm Internal Radius to shelves including under top & bottom. (Refer to Base Corner Cabinets)
      • Move cabinet back onto plan.
      • Zero out toe kick to lower blind panel to floor,Check reveals to door & check blind panel sizes.
      • Duplicate end panel to create whiteboard return panel,resize to suit.= Overall height, Minus 16mm.Edge all round.
      • Re number white board cabinet & create 2 Numbers on the data base.

    • Corner Pantry

      • Check for finished ends.
      • Change construction file to #7 Corner Pantry
      • Check shelving - See below for routered shelves.
      • Check hinging.
      • Check door height - (Door measurement works from the top of the kicker) - So if a 10mm gap is needed working off a 116mm kicker - This will be a minus -106mm.
      • 586mm depth = 16mm scribe.
      • Top scribe = 16mm.
      • Door reveals to be set at 16.45.
        Copy top to create a bottom the bottom in the drawing is only a template (Pantry on kicker only)- Added 10/8/16
      • Add bottom whiteboard kicker. (Pantry on kicker only)
      • Duplicate bottom and create an a filler to match the angle of the cabinet.
        Routered Shelves
      • Go into Multicross click on the shelf right click - Shape - Modify.
      • Change width of shelf to 420mm - Click on break point right click - Position.
      • Change angle line to right angles - Click on angle line right click - Add break point - Click on break point right click - Position - Type in measurement to suit 46.5mm.
      • Add 100mm radius to shelf - Same as in Base Corner Cabinet.

    • Pantry Doors

      • Add a wall on the plan - (Top right hand tool bar)
      • Choose custom panel - (Bottom tool bar)
      • Choose - (Wainscot on the floor)
      • Untick - (Extend Wainscot to ceiling)
      • Untick - (Include counter top)
      • Enter the height of the doors - Minus the top & bottom gaps needed - Click OK.
      • Enter the width of the doors - Minus the left & right gaps needed - Click OK.

    • Wall Oven/Mircowave Units

      Choose which construction file you need

      #8.2 Comes with no coloured top - For mircowave trim kit

      • No need to minus the 16mm off the mircowave height.
      • Change to Unfinished Ends.
      • Add shelf in by using horizontal partitions - Also remove joints from shelf.
        #8.1 Comes with a coloured top - For mircowave trim kit
      • No need to minus the 16mm off for mircowave height.
      • Change to Unfinished Ends.
      • Add shelf in by using horizontal partitions - Also remove joints from shelf.
      • Change to Walloven Framed in the data base. To change click on the cabinet field next to the cabinet number.

      #8 Standard wall oven/mircowave follow as below

      • Change to Unfinished Ends.
      • Change Construction File to Walloven/MW Section - #8 Hot Key.
      • Minus 17mm Off for 16mm & 19mm off for 18mm Mircowave Height -(Check height on paperwork) -Type in the size needed in Cabinet Modify - Tops/Bots - Top Scribe Field.

      Walloven Framed

      • Use 8.1 file construction
      • This will give you a colored Top and Bottom
      • tick No Top under Tops/Bots to remove Top
      • Check Top Scribe to suit.
      • Minus 1mm in top scribe field under Tops/Bots to make cutting list/height of cabinet right.

      Mircowave Opening

      Do The same as Open Shelf but use No Ends for left & right ends.

      Bottom Drawers

      • Same Process as Standard Drawer Cabinet but use 2 Pantry Cabinet as the construction file. Or 2.1 Pantry (FDS) if a door cabinet is under the oven.

      Top Cabinet

      • Change to Unfinished Ends.
      • Change Construction File to #6.1 Upper Captive Gable - #6 Hot Key.
      • Change to Interior Bottom.
      • Replace doors - Section modify - (Details) - Change to Door in (Section type Field) - Change to Pair if needed (Door Hinging Field)
      • Check Shelving.
      • Check Reveals & Minus 2mm off Bottom of Doors in (Section Modify)

    • Pantry Angle End

      • Change construction file to Pantry Corner End (NS)
      • Change cabinet width size to suit 16mm voids to left & right. EG. 560mm to 544mm.
      • Change cabinet panels depth size by minus 16mm. EG. 118mm to 102mm.
      • Change end panels to cover voids - go into left & right ends - Change to applied end - Minus 16mm to rear.
      • If glass shelves are needed - Leave one 16mm whiteboard shelf in for templating. To change to glass - Double click on shelf - Click on Material - Type “G” on the keyboard for glass.

    • Tambor Cabinet

      • Check for finished ends
      • Untick & Retick - No Bottom
      • Change construction file to Tambor Cabinets
      • Section Type - “Open’’

    • Tall Open Cabinets

      • Check for finished ends.
      • Construction file (Open clipped end)
      • Remove cams from cabinet parts when processing the job.

    • Kickers

      • Add a wall to the plan - ( Top right hand tool bar) or use a existing wall.

      • Click on custom panel - (Bottom tool bar)

      • Untick - Extend wainscot to ceiling.

      • Untick - Counter top.

      • Add the length in the (Wainscot height field) - EG 2385mm.

      • Add the width in the cabinet width window - EG 116mm.

      • Place kicker on the wall.

      • Double click on kicker - Click on Panel type Change to Panels - Kick in panel type field using the drop down arrow - Click on Sizes and change the quantity to suit.

    • Bar Kick Panel - (Wainscot)

      • Check height against database and bench height (especially if top thickness is different to 34mm).
      • Add 1mm to the width of panel.

    • Tall,Base & Wall Panels

      • Change Construction File to Upper Cabinets
      • Check Depth.
        Needs to be 20mm + Adjoining cabinet depth for general panel requirements.

    • Upper Fillers

      • Change to 1 x Finished End & 1 x No End.

      • Change to Upper Filler in Construction File.

      • Check Depth for required finished size.

    • Fridge Filler

      • Change to 1 x Finished End & 1 x No End

      • Change to Fridge Filler in Construction file.

      • Check Depth for required finished size.

    • Base Filler

      Base filler Includes Benchtop & kicker into over all measurement in Cad drawing

      • Check For Finished Ends (Check that both are “NO End“)

      • Check for Fixing Cleat requirements - Note corner fillers do have cleats already priced in.

      • Change Construction File to Base Cabinets (Hot Key 1)

      • When used next to a base servery cabinet change the Toe Kick to (None)

    • Tall Filler

      • Check For Finished Ends (Check that both are “NO End“)

      • Check for Fixing Cleat requirements.

      • Change Construction File to 2 Pantry (Hot Key 2)

    • Corner Fillers

      • Check corner filler sizing.
      • Check for Finished Ends (Check that both are NO Ends )
      • Change Construction File to 1 Base Cabinets (Hot Key 1)
      • Delete one filler panel out of the cutting list only one is needed.
      • Check the panel is edged all round.
      • Fixing cleats are already priced in no need to include.

    • Shelving/Panels

      • Repeat the first seven steps above in Kickers.
      • Double click on shelf - Change colour to suit in the Exterior field.
      • Click on Panel Type then change edging to suit in the Panel type field.
      • Multi-cross Section
        Selected Cabinet - Hit Enter
      • Hot Key
        Use the Number prefix to FAST select items from menu list

    • New Room - Creates a new room

      Open Room - Opens a previously created room

      Save Room - Saves the current job you are working on

      Print - Prints the page you are on

      Cut - Allows you to cut out a cabinet\panel and paste it elsewhere

      Copy - Allows you to duplicate a cabinet\panel and paste it elsewhere

      Paste - Allows you to paste a cabinet\panel elsewhere after cutting or copying it

      Undo - Can Undo your last change in the job. Caution: This button can also Undo more then one change watch out.

      All (Target Button) - Sets the view of job back to default (No zoom)

      Zoom in - Allows you to zoom in on job

      Zoom out - Allows yo to zoom out of job

      Snapshot - Takes a picture of each elevation and plan

      Tape Measure - Lets you measure the cabinets and panels

      Previous\Next Wall - Change between walls in elevation view

      Add Vertical - Adds a vertical partition in cabinets

      Add Horizontal - Adds a horizontal partition in cabinets

    • Floor Plan - Brings you to the plan view (Overhead view of the job)

      Elevation - Brings you to the elevation (Wall view of the job)

      Render - Brings you to a 3D view of the job

      Multidraw - Brings you to a sheet where your previously taken snapshot photos are placed, where they can be moved around and set up for printing

      Cabinet - Brings you to an overall view of one selected cabinet

    • The bottom Tab consists of different types of cabinets you can draw into the kitchen, such as:

      Standard base\upper cabinets that come at the kitchen bench height and your choice of width

      Pantries that come at the overall kitchen height and your choice of width

      Corner Cabinets that come at a choice of width and depth for both sides of the cabinet

      Special Cabinets are cabinets that you can change the entire aspect of the cabinet.(Off the floor, on the floor, height, width, etc..)

      You can also draw Panels into the kitchen by way of the bottom tab, a Room Default shortcut is also located here.

      There are two other buttons on this tab, Cutlist and CNC Center, which we will talk about later.

    • Blind Pantry

      Using a dynamic multicross on this cabinet will cause it to become distorted after saving and re-entering the cabinet.

      SOLUTION: Only save the multicross using saved MXS.

    • COL Glass Doors

      Glass Doors are comprised of two styles and 2 rails. They are created out of the standard doors that come with the cabinet.Click on Wall Door in CNC centre when checking parts.

      Door Styles

      • Increase height of door by 10mm - to be trimmed down later
      • Change width of door to 200mm. This will be cut down into 2 lengths @ 80mm each.
      • Change name of part to “G-Style 2 @ 80”.

      Door styles: 10mm oversized all round
      200mm Wide
      75mm finished size
      Description: G-Style 2 @ 80

      Rails

      • Change height of door to 220mm
      • Changing the width of door: Door width minus 150. This measurement must be correct as this sets the width of the door. This will be cut down into 2 pieces @ 100mm each.
      • Change name of part

      Eg. 200 x 150mm. G-Rail 2 @ 100

      Rails: Door width minus 150
      220mm high
      Description: G-Rail 2 @ 100

      Glass

      COL door glass\shelves - polished all round

      Glass Size - 110 minus off the height and width for glass size

      Polytec

      Polytec door glass- straight cut edges/5 cent corners.

      Glass Size - 118 minus off the height and width for glass size

    • Base Door Cabinet

      • Check sizing of cabinet to order.
      • Check for Scribe Requirements.
      • Check Hinging.
        • Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts, Draw Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts.
      • Check Shelving.
        • No. of Shelf Pins, No. of Shelf Pin Columns, Shelf Pin Positioning, Adjustable Shelf Depth.
      • Check Reveals.
        • Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets.

    • Base Sink Cabinet

      • Check sizing of cabinet to order.
      • Check for Scribe Requirements.
      • Check for Construction Requirements.
        • Check Vertical Rail.
      • Check Hinging.
        • Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts, Draw Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts.
      • Check Shelving.
        • No. of Shelf Pins, No. of Shelf Pin Columns, Shelf Pin Positioning, Adjustable Shelf Depth.
        • 5 Adjustable Shelf Holes for Sink Cabinets.
      • Check Reveals.
        • Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets.

    • Base Return Cabinet

      • Check sizing of cabinet to order.
      • Check for Scribe Requirements.
      • Check for Construction Requirements.
        • Check Vertical Rail.
        • Check Return Panel.
      • Check Hinging.
        • Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts, Draw Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts.
      • Check Shelving.
        • Add second column of Shelf Pin Holes when back is 1351mm or more on a Return Cabinet.
      • Check Reveals.
        • Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets.

    • Base Corner Cabinets

      • Check sizing of cabinet to order.
      • Check for Scribe Requirements.
      • Check Hinging.
        • Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts, Draw Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts.
      • Check Shelving.
        • No. of Shelf Pins, No. of Shelf Pin Columns, Shelf Pin Positioning, Adjustable Shelf Depth
        • Add second column of Shelf Pin Holes when back is 1351mm or more on a Corner Cabinet.
      • Check Reveals.
        • Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets.

    • Base Drawer Cabinets

      • Check sizing of cabinet to order.
      • Check for scribe requirements.
      • Check Drawers.
        • Drawer Height, Drawer Depth, Hardware Kits, Drawer Clearances, Appliance Conflicts.
      • Check Reveals.
        • Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets.

    • Base Servery Cabinet

      • Check sizing of cabinet to order.
      • Check for Scribe Requirements.
      • Check for Construction Requirements.
        • Check Door/Floor Clearance.
      • Check Hinging.
        • Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts, Draw Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts.
      • Check Shelving.
        • No. of Shelf Pins, No. of Shelf Pin Columns, Shelf Pin Positioning, Adjustable Shelf Depth.
      • Check Reveals.
        • Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets.

    • UBO Cabinet

      • Check sizing of cabinet to order.
      • Check for scribe requirements.
      • Check Oven Opening.
      • Check Front Face Panels.

    • UBM Cabinet

      • Check sizing of cabinet to order.
      • Check for Scribe Requirements.
      • Check Drawers.
        • Drawer Height, Drawer Depth, Hardware Kits, Drawer Clearances, Appliance Conflicts.
      • Check Microwave Opening.
      • Check Reveals.
        • Remove Reveals on Microwave Cabinet. Add 2mm Reveal to adjacent Cabinets.

    • Pantry Cabinets

      • Check sizing of cabinet to order.
      • Check for Scribe Requirements.
      • Check Hinging.
        • Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts, Draw Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts.
      • Check Drawers.
        • Drawer Height, Drawer Depth, Hardware Kits, Drawer Clearances, Appliance Conflicts.
      • Check Shelving.
        • No. of Shelf Pins, No. of Shelf Pin Columns, Shelf Pin Positioning, Adjustable Shelf Depth.
      • Check Reveals.
        • Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets.
      • If the inner drawer runner is not the same as the default you will need to change it in the Cabinet Properties.
        • With the cabinet in Cabinet View click on the Section tab then the Properties tab. - Click on the Hardware tab.
          Use the drop down box in the Guides Schedule to select the runner you need.

    • Return Pantry Cabinets

      • Check sizing of cabinet to order.
      • Check for Scribe Requirements.
      • Check for Construction Requirements.
        • Check Return Panel.
        • Check Door/Floor Clearance.
      • Check Hinging.
        • Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts, Draw Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts.
      • Check Shelving.
        • No. of Shelf Pins, No. of Shelf Pin Columns, Shelf Pin Positioning, Adjustable Shelf Depth.
        • Add second column of Shelf Pin Holes when back is 1351mm or more on a Return Cabinet.
      • Check Reveals.
        • Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets.

    • Angled Pantry Cabinets

      • Check sizing of cabinet to order.
      • Check for Scribe Requirements.
      • Check Hinging.
        • Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts, Draw Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts.
      • Check Shelving.
        • No. of Shelf Pins, No. of Shelf Pin Columns, Shelf Pin Positioning, Adjustable Shelf Depth.
      • Check Reveals.
        • Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets.

    • Split Pantry Cabinets

      • Check sizing of cabinet to order.
      • Check for Scribe Requirements.
      • Check Hinging.
        • Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts, Draw Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts.
      • Check Drawers.
        • Drawer Height, Drawer Depth, Hardware Kits, Drawer Clearances, Appliance Conflicts.
      • Check Shelving.
        • No. of Shelf Pins, No. of Shelf Pin Columns, Shelf Pin Positioning, Adjustable Shelf Depth.
      • Check Reveals.
        • Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets.

    • Broom Cabinets

      • Check sizing of cabinet to order.
      • Check for Scribe Requirements.
      • Check Hinging.
        • Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts, Draw Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts.
      • Check Shelving.
        • No. of Shelf Pins, No. of Shelf Pin Columns, Shelf Pin Positioning, Adjustable Shelf Depth.

    • Wall Door Cabinet

      • Check sizing of cabinet to order.
      • Check Hinging.
        • Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts.
      • Check Shelving.
        • No. of Shelf Pins, No. of Shelf Pin Columns, Shelf Pin Positioning, Adjustable Shelf Depth.
      • Check Reveals.
        • Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets.

    • Wall Return Cabinet

      • Check sizing of cabinet to order.
      • Check Construction Requirements.
        • Check Return Panel.
      • Check Hinging.
        • Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts, Draw Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts.
      • Check Shelving.
        • No. of Shelf Pins, No. of Shelf Pin Columns, Shelf Pin Positioning, Adjustable Shelf Depth.
        • Add second column of Shelf Pin Holes when back is 1351mm or more.
      • Check Reveals.
        • Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets.

    • Wall Corner Cabinet

      • Check sizing of cabinet to order.
      • Check Hinging.
        • Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts.
      • Check Shelving.
        • Add second column of Shelf Pin Holes when back is 951mm or more.
      • Check Reveals.
        • Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets.

    • Fridge Cabinet

      • Check sizing of cabinet to order.
      • Check Elevation & Fridge Space
      • Check Hinging.
        • Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts.
      • Check Reveals.
        • Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets.

    • Rangehood Cabinet

      • Check sizing of cabinet to order.
      • Check for Construction Requirements.
        • Check Rangehood Specifications & Modify Ducting.
      • Check Hinging.
        • Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts, Draw Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts.
      • Check Shelving.
        • No. of Shelf Pins, No. of Shelf Pin Columns, Shelf Pin Positioning, Adjustable Shelf Depth.
      • Check Reveals.
        • Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets.

    • Wall Microwave Cabinet

      • Check sizing of cabinet to order.
      • Check for Construction Requirements.
        • Check for Finished Ends.
        • Check Appliance Opening.
      • Check Hinging.
        • Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts, Draw Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts.
      • Check Reveals.
        • Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets.

      • Job gets checked over and corrected for software to convert to machining. -> Accept job when checks are completed.

      • Procedure

      • Procedure Stock Hardware

      • Procedure Job Hardware

      • Procedure Ploytec Doors

      • Procedure Boxing Hardware for Jobs

        • Turn ON Isolator Box
        • Turn ON CNC Console
        • Press NC ON Button during boot-up
          • Wait for Software to boot-up before continuing
        • Release Emergency Stop Button
        • Press Purple Reset Button
        • Run vncviewer program on desktop
        • Click Connect
        • Allow Labeling Machine to boot-up
        • Run Labeling Control program on desktop
        • Click Home, to calibrate Labeling Machine
        • Press Auto, on Scissor Lift Control 1 & 2
        • Press ON, on Photoelectric Barrier 1 & 2
        • Calibrate the Machine. Refer
        • Confirm the Tool. Refer
        • Machine is Calibrated
        • Tools have been Confirmed
        • Machine Bed is Empty
        • Scissor Lifts are ready
        • Run Campro DNC program on desktop
        • Turn Mode Dial to DNC
        • Select Labeling and Cutting
        • Click Browse under the heading Database File
        • Searching the (R:) Drive, open the folder for current job. Select & Open .csv file
        • Click Multi Open
          • This will automatically open to the current job file
        • Select & Open the required .anc files
        • Order the .anc files in the correct order by clicking the Up & Down buttons on Campro DNC
        • Change Values in the Area drop-down
          • Value 1 will load sheets from Scissor Lift 1
          • Value 2 will load sheets from Scissor Lift 2
          • Value 1 & 2 will load sheets from both scissor lifts alternately
        • Set Feed Rate to appropriate rate for material
          • Feed Rate 100 for Particleboard. Feed Rate 80 for MDF
        • Vacuum Pumps & Automatic must be ON
        • Click Transfer
          • This will start the job immediately. Make any changes before clicking Transfer
        • Allow Machine to operate automatically
          • Components will operate independently following a process. This process is dependant on the operator confirming the load & offload transfer of sheets
        • At completion of cutting, the Machine Head will sit stationary at the Home Position
        • Press Green Cycle Start Button
          • This will position the Machine Head for offloading. The Labelling Machine will pick up the next sheet & wait for the Machine Bed to be cleared
        • Press Green Cycle Start Button
          • The Machine Head will push off the current material & the Labelling Machine will load the next sheet. Once aligned, the Machine will operate to the process automatically
        • Run Campro DNC program on desktop
        • Turn Mode Dial to DNC
        • Select Cutting Only
        • Click Browse under the heading Job Folder
        • Searching the (R:) Drive, open the folder for current job. Click OK
        • Click Multi Open
          • This will automatically open to the current job file
        • Select & Open the required .anc files
        • Order the .anc files in the correct order by clicking the Up & Down buttons on Campro DNC
        • Change Values in the Area drop-down
          • Value 1 will load sheets from Scissor Lift 1
          • Value 2 will load sheets from Scissor Lift 2
          • Value 1 & 2 will load sheets from both scissor lifts alternately
        • Set Feed Rate to appropriate rate for material
          • Feed Rate 100 for Particleboard. Feed Rate 80 for MDF
        • Vacuum Pumps & Automatic must be ON
        • Click Transfer
          • This will start the job immediately. Make any changes before clicking Transfer
        • Allow Machine to operate automatically
          • Components will operate independently following a process. This process is dependant on the operator confirming the load & offload transfer of sheets
        • At completion of cutting, the Machine Head will sit stationary at the Home Position
        • Press Green Cycle Start Button
          • This will position the Machine Head for offloading. The Labelling Machine will pick up the next sheet & wait for the Machine Bed to be cleared
        • Press Green Cycle Start Button
          • The Machine Head will push off the current material & the Labelling Machine will load the next sheet. Once aligned, the Machine will operate to the process automatically
        • After current sheet has been routed & Machine Head is waiting to be positioned for offloading
        • Turn OFF Vacuum Pumps
        • Turn ON Vacuum Pumps
          • Wait for all pumps to turn ON
        • Press Green Cycle Start Button
        • Click Home
          • Allow machine to travel
        • Close Labeling Program
        • Turn OFF Labeling Computer
        • Refer to Unload the Tool
          • A sheet must be on the Spoil Board when leaving the machine overnight
        • Close Campro DNC, vncviewer, LabelIT, & any other applications
        • Press Emergency Stop Button
        • Close CNC Program
        • Press NC OFF Button
        • Turn OFF Computer
        • Turn OFF CNC Console
        • Turn OFF Main Isolator Switch
        • Hold Tool in the Spindle with right hand
        • Press Manual Tool Release with left hand
          • The Tool should be released and can be pulled away from the Spindle
        • Press the Manual Rotate Button
          • This will rotate the Tool Magazine clockwise once
            • Continue until desired Tool Claw is facing the Load Flap
        • Place Tool into the Tool Claw
        • Rotate until Tool 1 is facing the Spindle
          • You must Confirm the Tool after manually adjusting Tools
        • Run LabelIT
        • Click Select
        • Highlight Select Job Path
        • Click Select
        • Searching in (N:) Drive, Select & Open the job
        • Click Open
        • Scroll to the correct sheet using the Page Next buttons
        • Highlight the part for labeling
        • Click Print
        • Scroll to the correct sheet
        • Click Print Sheet
        • This Process must be done at the VNC Console
          • Open Labeling Control
          • Enter 2800.00 in Machine Position for X
          • Click Move X
          • Click No. 3 Forward
          • Click No. 1~3 Down
          • Click No. 1~3 Clamp ON
          • Click No. 1~3 Up
          • Enter 13100.00 in Machine Position for X
          • Click No. 1~3 Down
          • Click No. 1~3 Clamp OFF
          • Click No. 1~3 Up
          • Click No. 3 Back
          • Click HOME

        Reverse the order if taking Material from the Router Bed

        • This Process must be done at the VNC Console
          • Open Labeling Control
          • Enter 7500.00 in Machine Position for X
          • Click Move X
          • Click No. 1~3 Down
          • Click No. 1~3 Clamp ON
          • Click No. 1~3 Up
          • Enter 12300.00 in Machine Position for X
          • Click No. 1~3 Down
          • Click No. 1~3 Clamp OFF
          • Click No. 1~3 Up
          • Click HOME

        Reverse the order if taking Material from the Router Bed

          • Blow down components with Compressed Air
          • 1-2 pumps per nipple (4 total) of EP0
          • Clean inside the Spindle with Spindle Cleaning Tool
            • Turn Mode Dial to Jog. Open Router Head Cover. Remove the Tool from the Spindle by pressing the Tool Unlock Button. Hold the Tool Unlock Button & insert the Spindle Cleaning Tool, make 5 rotations and remove.
          • Blow down components with Compressed Air
          • Rise & Fall: 1-2 pumps per nipple (4 total) of UniLube
          • Drill Block: 1 pumps per nipple (5 total) of UniLube
          • Blow down components with Compressed Air
          • Blow down Snorkel Filters (3 total) with Compressed Air
          • Blow down VNC computer filters (2 total)
          • Blow down components with Compressed Air
          • Grease Block: 2-3 pumps per nipple (8 total) of EP0
          • Stamp Head: 1-2 pumps on the nipple of EP0
          • Alignment Cup: 1-2 pumps per nipple (2 total) of EP0
          • Extension Frame: 1-2 pumps per nipple (4 total) of EP0
          • Spray all Guide Rails with WD40 and wipe down with rags
          • Label Machine Guide Rail Bearings: 2-3 pumps per nipple (8 total) of EP0
          • Blow down components with Compressed Air
          • Check Hydraulic Fluid Level
            • If below Red Line, call for Professional Assistance
          • Dust Lift Sensors
          • Blow down components with Compressed Air
          • Blow down Fan Filter
          • Blow down components with Compressed Air
          • Lightly blow down rear Air Filters
          • Vacuum or blow away dust
          • Spray with WD40 wipe away with rag
          • Spray with Silicone Spray

        • Spray with WD40 then blow down with compressed air

        • 1 pump per nipple (2 total) of UniLube

          • Spray each pin with WD40 & clean with rag
          • Spray with Silicone Spray

        • Blow down Secondary Filters (3 total) with Compressed Air

        • Carbon Vanes inside Vacuum Pumps must be removed, measure, and reported on condition by a Technician

        • Grease Vacuum Pumps using Becker Lubricant 1 pump per nipple (1 per Vacuum Pump, 3 total)

            • Check the Sensor on the Spindle Cylinder

              • If light is ON: Wire is loose
              • If light is OFF:Check if spindle is in correct position
                • May be obstructed by objects.
                • Water in the airlines
                • Sensor may need adjusting
                • Faulty Sensor

            • Machine thinks Safety Hood is open.

              Close Safety Hood & press the Purple Reset Button
              If alarm doesn’t clear:

              • Loose/Bad connection between switch and computer
              • Faulty safety switch

            • Photoelectric Barriers were tripped.

              Press Green Cycle Start Button to resume

            • The thermal sensor inside the spindle has overheated.

              Call a technician. Check for:

              • Failed bearing
              • Overload during cutting
              • Thermal sensor faulty
              • Loose wire or connection

            • The PMM tool carousel motor driver is loose the reference signal or other alarm shows up. And the possible reason could be:

              • The voltage of Battery, which located on the PMM servo driver, is too low and loose the reference signal. Re-calibrate the reference point will clear the alarm. And replace the battery if possible
              • Loose wire or connector
              • Servo driver defected

            • The tool touch off signal is not works accordingly and the possible reason could be:

              • The tool length setting of tool touch off parameters is been set too long
              • The sensor of tool touch off device is defected
              • Loose wire or connector.

            • The signal of the inverter brake thermo sensor is been activated and the possible reason could be:

              • Faulty thermo sensor
              • Loose wire or connection of signal
              • Faulty braking unit
              • Faulty inverter
              • Faulty spindle

            • Tool change did not complete. Turn Mode Selection Switch to Jog mode and depress TM Rotation button to return tool changer to “Park Position”. Reference “Z” axis and re-confirm the tool.

            • Vacuum pressure of zone 2 is low. Cover open area of table, corners of spoilboard not vacuumed down, gasket rolled out of channel or stretched too far when installed, dirty filters on pump. If all of these are good, remove spoilboard and plug all ports then turn on vacuum. Vacuum gauge should read @ 22 In. HG. If reading is good then problem with gasket, etc.

            • Vacuum pressure of zone1 is low. Cover open area of table, corners of spoilboard not vacuumed down, gasket rolled out of channel or stretched too far when installed, dirty filters on pump. If all of these are good, remove spoilboard and plug all ports then turn on vacuum. Vacuum gauge should read @ 22 In. HG. If reading is good then problem with gasket, etc.

            • Over current alarm on the spindle inverter, too deep of a cut, or diameter of cutter too large, bad inverter or Q1 breaker tripped. Press STOP/RESET button on invert and reset the alarm.

            • Check overloads in electric drawer (OL 20, OL21, OL42 & OL52). Depress blue tab on top of overload to reset. Reset alarm.

            • Check oil level on oiler. Refill.

            • Low air pressure, open air valve, check air supply.

            • Sensor on air cylinder for “Z” axis lock is not detecting. Check travel of cylinder, air pressure, may need to adjust sensor, faulty sensor.

            • Dirty spindle, clean either tool holder or inside of spindle with cleaner in tool kit, faulty sensor in spindle, tool change height may need adjusted. If cleaning tool holder and spindle taper does not clear the alarm, contact service.

            • TM Forward Sensor on Tool Magazine air cylinder is not detecting. Check for obstruction that would prevent the tool magazine from extending completely under the spindle, dirty guides, water in lines, loose screws on dust cover on center hub of tool magazine. The sensor may need adjustment or replacement if the tool changer is traveling the full distance.

            • TM Backward Sensor on Tool Magazine air cylinder is not detecting. Check for obstruction that would prevent the tool magazine from returning completely to “Park Position”, dirty guides, water in lines, loose screws on dust cover on centre hub of tool magazine. The sensor may need adjustment or replacement if the tool changer is travelling the full distance.

            • Check sensor on cylinder for led light. If light is on, loose wire. If light is off, is spindle all the way up? If cylinder is not all the way up, check for obstructions that the cylinder may be stuck on, water in air lines, sensor may need adjustment, faulty sensor.

            • Check sensor on cylinder for led light. If light is on, loose wire. If light is off, is spindle all the way down? If cylinder is not all the way down, check for obstructions that the cylinder may be stuck on, water in air lines, sensor may need adjustment, faulty sensor.

            • The TM counter sensor is not works accordingly and the possible reason could be:

              • The sensor location is out and need to be adjusted
              • Faulty sensor
              • Loose wire or connection

            • One or more sensor of TM is malfunction and need to be adjust accordingly.

            • Call of incorrect tool number in program, Ex. instead of T101 calling T01. Tool numbers must be between 101 and 112. Modify program with correct tool number.

            • #1 Tool change did not complete. Turn Mode Selection Switch to Jog mode and depress TM Rotation button to return tool changer to “Park Position”. Reference “Z” axis and re-confirm the tool.

            • Check for obstructions that would prevent tool magazine from completing rotation. Switch to jog mode rotate tool changer manually with button, then re-confirm the tool.

            • Re-confirm the tool

            • Coast down time of spindle is too long, too large of cutter, or bad inverter. Contact Service

            • Check sensor on cylinder for led light. If light is on, loose wire. If light is off, is spindle all the way up? If spindle is not all the way up, check for obstructions that the spindle may be stuck on, water in air lines, sensor may need adjustment, faulty sensor.

            • Check sensor on cylinder for led light. If light is on, loose wire. If light is off, is brush all the way up? If brush is not all the way up, check for obstructions that the brush may be stuck on, water in air lines, sensor may need adjustment, faulty sensor.

            • Detects draw bar down, remove tool holder from spindle and check for debris in tool holder, or bad sensor

            • Bad switch / broken wire or loose cam on z axis confirm switch. Call service

            • Saw 0 degree sensor is not activated accordingly and the possible reason could be:

              • Saw is not been turn to 0 degree properly or stuck
              • Saw 0 degree sensor is out
              • Sensor need be re-adjust or Faulty sensor
              • Loose wire or connection

            • Saw 90 degree sensor is not activated accordingly and the possible reason could be:

              • Saw is not been turn to 0 degree properly or stuck
              • Saw 90 degree sensor is out
              • Faulty sensor
              • Loose wire or connection

            • Bad switch / broken wire or loose cam on Y axis confirm switch. Call service

            • Bad sensor / broken wire or dust gate stuck.

            • The spindle cooling unit is not functioning properly and response to the error code with the suggested reaction on the sticker.

            • Bad sensor / broken wire or TM cover is stuck

            • Spindle did not reach set speed in specified interval: too large of cutter, low voltage to machine, faulty inverter. Call service.

            • Remote box has been enabled

            • Check sensor on cylinder for led light. If light is on, loose wire. If light is off, is spindle all the way up? If spindle is not all the way up, check for obstructions that the spindle may be stuck on, water in air lines, sensor may need adjustment, faulty sensor.

            • The vacuum clamp cannot activate and the machine cannot run on AUTO.

            • The #2 PMM tool carousel motor driver is loose the reference signal or other alarm shows up. And the possible reason could be:

              • The voltage of Battery, which located on the PMM servo driver, is too low and loose the reference signal. Re-calibrate the reference point will clear the alarm. And replace the battery if possible
              • Loose wire or connector
              • Servo driver defected

            • The PMM axis motor driver is loose the reference signal or other alarm shows up. And the possible reason could be:

              • The voltage of Battery, which located on the PMM servo driver, is too low and loose the reference signal. Re-calibrate the reference point will clear the alarm. And replace the battery if possible
              • Loose wire or connector
              • Servo driver defected

            • Check for obstructions that would prevent tool magazine from completing rotation. Switch to jog mode rotate tool changer manually with button, then re-confirm the tool.

            • TM Forward Sensor on Tool Magazine air cylinder is not detecting. Check for obstruction that would prevent the tool magazine from extending completely under the spindle, dirty guides, water in lines, loose screws on dust cover on center hub of tool magazine. The sensor may need adjustment or replacement if the tool changer is travelling the full distance.

            • TM Backward Sensor on Tool Magazine air cylinder is not detecting. Check for obstruction that would prevent the tool magazine from returning completely to “Park Position”, dirty guides, water in lines, loose screws on dust cover on center hub of tool magazine. The sensor may need adjustment or replacement if the tool changer is traveling the full distance.

            • one or more of the TM sensors is not functioning properly

            • Off-loading conveyer up limit switch alarm is activated by:

              • Conveyer is too far from vacuum table
              • Limit switch need be re-adjust or Faulty limit switch
              • Loose wire or connection

            • The nc machine is move into crashproof zone which located about 1 meter in reference side of X axis direction.

            • The overload of motor on no.1 lifting table is activated by the possible reason of:

              • Faulty motor
              • Loose wire or connection
              • Mechanical stuck of lifting table

            • conveyer stop signal is been activated by the panel or sensor is faulty or wire loose.

            • The ready signal of conveyer inverter is OFF and the possible reason could be:

              • Motor stuck or faulty
              • Faulty inverter
              • Loose wire or connection

            • The NC machine is not been park to the end of table while labeling machine is reach to NC machine side or the safety confirm signal is off by faulty sensor, loose wire/connection

            • The overload of motor on conveyer table is activated by the possible reason of:

              • Faulty motor
              • Loose wire or connection
              • Mechanical stuck of lifting table

            • The overload of motor on no.2 lifting table is activated by the possible reason of:

              • Faulty motor
              • Loose wire or connection
              • Mechanical stuck of lifting table

            • Pop up pins are not all down, sensor on one of the pins needs adjustment, bad sensor.

            • Check grease oil level on central grease lub. unit Refill.

            • Check sensor on cylinder for led light. If light is on, loose wire. If light is off, is spindle all the way up? If spindle is not all the way up, check for obstructions that the spindle may be stuck on, water in air lines, sensor may need adjustment, faulty sensor.

            • one of crashproof sensor on lifting table, which located on the top of material high sensor is activated abnormally and remove the obstruction from sensing area

            • Saw is not retreat to up position and the possible reason could be:

              • No lubrication on oiler
              • Mechanical stuck
              • Sensor need be re-adjust or Faulty sensor
              • Loose wire or connection

            • The up sensor of side door on spindle cover is not been activated during tool change process and the possible reason could be:

              • Cover stuck
              • Sensor need be re-adjust or Faulty sensor
              • Loose wire or connection

            • The safety fence door been open and close the door for the AUTO operation. Or the signal circuit is failed or faulty switch.

            • The no.2 safety fence door been open and close the door for the AUTO operation. Or the signal circuit is failed or faulty switch.

            • The limit switch of conveyer down is not works accordingly during process and the possible reason could be:

              • Conveyer motor is not works accordingly or stuck
              • Limit switch need be re-adjust or Faulty limit switch
              • Loose wire or connection

            • Saw is not retreat to up position and the possible reason could be:

              • No lubrication on oiler
              • Mechanical stuck
              • Sensor need be re-adjust or Faulty sensor
              • Loose wire or connection

            • No.1 horizontal drill in X direction return sensor is not be activated by the possible reason:

              • Cylinder stuck or block by chip/dust,,etc
              • Sensor need be re-adjust or Faulty sensor
              • Loose wire or connection

            • No.2 horizontal drill in X direction return sensor is not be activated by the possible reason:

              • Cylinder stuck or block by chip/dust,,etc
              • Sensor need be re-adjust or Faulty sensor
              • Loose wire or connection

            • No.3 horizontal drill in X direction return sensor is not be activated by the possible reason:

              • Cylinder stuck or block by chip/dust,,etc
              • Sensor need be re-adjust or Faulty sensor
              • Loose wire or connection

            • No.1 horizontal drill in Y direction return sensor is not be activated by the possible reason:

              • Cylinder stuck or block by chip/dust,,etc
              • Sensor need be re-adjust or Faulty sensor
              • Loose wire or connection
              • Glue Roller & Pot must be at Working Temperature
              • Lower Glue Pot Bypass to close off the Glue Pot
              • Open CombiMelt Menu
              • Press Empty
                • This will release any glue that is still around the Glue Roller
                • Wait until the glue is only a thin trickle
              • Lower Teflon Push Stick into the Glue Pot Bypass to push out any remaining glue around the Glue Roller, then remove
              • Fill the Glue Pot Bypass with Blue Cleaning Pellets while the Empty setting is still ON
                • Wait until Blue Cleaning Gel is running out the bottom of the Glue Roller
              • Press Clean Out & press Empty after Cleaning tick box
              • Fill the Glue Pot Bypass with Blue Cleaning Pellets
              • The cleaning process will take 90 minutes & the emptying process will take another 30 minutes
              • Lower Teflon Push Stick after emptying process is done to remove any remaining gel, then remove
              • Place Bypass Cap on
              • Open CombiMelt Menu
              • Press Forward ON
                • Wait until correct temperature is achieved and Glue Roller beings operation
              • Raise Glue Pot Bypass by 40mm
              • Wait until Glue Roller starts rolling with new glue
              • Open Factory Configuration
              • Open Pneumatic Controls
              • Press Enable Control
              • Select a Pneumatic Component:
                • PU Set Reinigungsmittel: Pink Cleaning Agent
                • PU Set Tennmittel: Clear Premilling Agent
                • Spruehen 1: Green Lubricating Agent
              • Press Enable Output
              • Press Green Button ON
                • Selected Component will continue to operate until Green Button is turned OFF
              • Open Safety Hoods
              • Locate the Brass Adjusting Knobs for the Component you wish to adjust
                • Cleaning Agent: Before Buffing Wheels at the end of the Machine
                • Pre-milling Agent: Before Premilling Unit at the front of the machine
                • Lubricating Agent: After Pressure Rollers at the front end of the Machine
              • Turning the Knob clockwise will allow less spray, turning counter clockwise will allow more spray.
                • Recommended procedure: Adjust Knob clockwise till tight, then adjust back counter-clockwise an 8th of a turn & test spray manually. Keep turning an 8th of a turn counter-clockwise until spraying at the desired amount.

            • This screen represents all pending orders from customers awaiting production staff verification.

            • Orders at this stage are checked for the following:

            • Room names should appropriately relate to the order.
              Appropriate names include: Kitchen, Laundry, Bathroom, Butlers Pantry, etc..
              But should never be left called “copy of etc..”

              • Drawers
              • Inner Drawers
              • Hinge Systems

              • Overall Height (Mandatory Field)
                • Height of kitchen from floor to ceiling
              • Ceiling clearance / bulkhead height (Mandatory Field)
              • Fridge height and clearance
                • Height from fridge cabinet to floor
              • Splash height
              • Rangehood clearance
                • Height of rangehood from top of benchtop
              • Bench height (Mandatory Field when order includes benchtop calculations)
                • Height from top of benchtop to floor
              • Bench thickness (Mandatory Field when order includes benchtop calculations)
              • Kick height (Mandatory Field when kicks required)
              • Wall cabinet depth
                • Measurement is exclusive of door
              • Base cabinet depth
                • Measurement is exclusive of door, including 16mm construction void when required
              • Pantry cabinet depth
                • Measurement is exclusive of door, including 16mm construction void when required
              • Cabinets
              • Assembly
              • Hardware
              • DDP (Doors, Drawers, Panels)
              • Legs
              • Packaging

            • Use this field to describe room level details E.g. Overall paint colour, Horizontal grain, etc.

              • Confirm styled-item thickness matches drawing
              • Confirm all edge selections are correct
              • Confirm kick selection
                • Check length specifically
              • Confirm multiple colour selections to cabinet list

            • Available Options

              • 1 BASE CABINETS (HOT KEY)
              • 3 BASE CABINET (NS) (HOT KEY)

            • Available Options

              • 4 SINK CABINET ( 4 = HOT KEY )
              • 4.1 SINK CABINET ( NO VOID ) (4.1 = HOT KEY)

              Turns top rail vertical to suit sink installation.

              http://screencast.com/t/yCyf3TeLVg

            • Available Options

              • 1 BASE CABINET (HOT KEY)
              • 3 BASE CABINET (NS) (HOT KEY)

            • Available Options
              4 SINK CABINET ( HOT KEY )
              4.1 SINK CABINET ( NO VOID ) (HOT KEY)
              Turns top rail vertical to suit Blind Panel assembly.

            • Available Options
              *1 BASE CABINET (HOT KEY)

              • 3 BASE CABINET (NS) (HOT KEY)

              • Available Options

                *Hot Key (Open Shelf)

                • Available Options

                  • UPPER CORNER CABINETS

                • Available Options

                  • M - Microwave (Upper) (Hot Key)
                  • 6.1 - Upper (Captive Gables) (Hot Key)

                • Available Options

                  • 2 PANTRY CABINET (HOT KEY)
                  • PANTRY CABINET (NS)
                  • 2.1 PANTRY CABINET (FDS) (HOT KEY)
                  • PANTRY CABINET (FDS)(NS)

                    • Job moves to “Ordering” -> Print out all required paperwork (eg. Report, drawings, appliance specs and then optomise the materials.

                      • Unload Truck
                      • Check invoice to match goods received
                        • Colour
                        • Finish
                        • Substrate
                        • Thickness
                        • Quantity
                        • Write job number on board
                        • Go to computer bring up job number that is on invoice
                        • Go to arriving
                        • Chose correct vendor
                        • Check invoice and order match, if so click on arrive
                          if not click on fail. This brings up fail box
                        • Fill in and save
                        • Go to ordering and send order
                      • Goods arrive by courier
                      • Remove invoice from package
                      • Check invoice to match goods received
                      • Place hardware in racking ( correct place )
                      • Stamp invoice with received stamp and sign
                      • Any goods missing or wrong , reception to chase up
                      • Goods arrive by courier
                      • Remove invoice from package
                      • Check invoice to match goods received
                      • Go to computer bring up job number that is on invoice
                      • Go to arriving
                      • Select correct vendor
                      • Check invoice and order match if so click on arrive
                        if not click on fail . This brings up fail box
                      • Fill in and save
                      • Go to ordering and send order
                      • Check f0r job name and number
                      • Go to job folder and remove door order
                      • Check label on door for
                        • Size
                        • Color
                        • Finish
                        • Design
                      • Check door for any defects
                        • Bubbles
                        • Vinyl lifting
                        • Indents
                        • Scratches
                      • Find door on order
                      • Check it is correct and mark order
                      • Write cabinet number on label
                      • If defect found take a note of ID number
                      • Put door aside
                      • Proceed with rest of pallet
                      • When completed go to computer
                      • Bring up Polytec Doors arriving
                      • Arrive doors
                      • Any defects , wrong doors, click on fail tab
                      • Enter sales order number, Tab down
                      • Enter ID number & Describtion of damaged item, Tab down.
                      • Reason for fail.
                      • Save
                      • Go to ordering
                      • Send order to Polytec
                      • Check calender
                      • Select job for boxing
                        Click on Boxing tab to bring up hardware list One part is for assembly - one for Delivery
                      • Write job name and delivery on box
                      • Get hardware marked for delivery and place in box
                      • When done put on trolly
                      • Do same for assembly
                      • Check bench for any other hardware for job
                      • Everything to be placed on one trolly

                        • Job Information

                          • Christian Name
                          • Surname
                          • Notes
                          • Customer Refferal Point

                        • Contacts

                        • Rooms

                          • Room Description
                          • Design Description
                          • Uploaded Drawing
                          • Default Hardware Brands
                            • Drawers:
                            • Inner Drawers:
                            • Hinge Systems:
                          • Room Dimensions
                            • All relevant dimensions must be completed
                          • Instructions
                            • Used to convey room specific instructions
                            • I.E. Paint colour

                        • Styles

                          • ( * ) Indicates Default Styled Item
                            • Default style only becomes relevant if two or more different colours or finishes are selected for the same styled-item.
                          • Styled-items:
                            • Door
                            • Drawer Fronts
                            • Panels
                            • Open Cabinet Material
                            • Kick - Melamine
                            • Kicks - Laminated
                            • Roller Shutter
                            • Roller Shutter Frame
                            • Bulkheads
                            • Glass Insert
                            • Glass Shelving
                            • Capping
                            • Paint
                            • Edge
                            • Pallet Skid

                        • Cabinets/Panels
                          This tab is used to list all cabinets and panels within the room.

                          • Cabinet ID
                            • Cabinet ID must specifically match all supplied drawings
                          • Product
                          • Dimensions
                            • Height x Width x Depth
                            • Dimensions relate to carcase size only, not including door.
                          • Quantity
                          • Actions
                            • Add Comments
                            • Duplicate
                            • Specify Second ID
                              • Production Level ID only
                            • Show Materials
                              • Production Level ID only
                            • Show Pricing
                              • Admin Level ID only
                            • Upload Drawing
                            • Edit
                            • Delete

                          Add Cabinet/Panel

                          USBC

                          • Un-stocked Board Charge Calculations

                          Sub Total
                          GST
                          Total

                        • Predominantly used for flat pack pricing
                          Allows for specific customers to use ladder frame kicks

                        • Once optomised -> Order materials to suit requirements.

                          • Place board in rack
                          • Write job number and name on goods
                          • Place on shelf
                          • Put with job when it is boxed

                          • Customer (Minimum Requirement)

                          • Deliver to

                          • Installer

                          • Contractor

                          • Agent

                          • Plumber

                          • Electrician

                          • Logistics

                          • Other

                          • Product Dialogue

                          • USBC

                            Unstocked Board Charge is applied to all board materials not recognised as stocked and/or frequently used. All off-cuts are calculated and included in the room sub total.

                            If — at the time of production — the setout team are able to salvage the sum of the USBC; they will remove any possible calculations from the room sub totals.

                            • Name (Minimum Requirement)
                            • Address (Minimum Requirement)
                            • Phone (Minimum Requirement)
                            • Fax
                            • Mobile
                            • Email
                          {"cards":[{"_id":"3c9ca370f859a4131200000f","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1193115,"position":1,"parentId":null,"content":"#**Anderson CNC Machine Procedures**\n"},{"_id":"3c9ca74df859a41312000010","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3c9ca370f859a4131200000f","content":"##**Operating Procedure**"},{"_id":"3cab51ec5cb626aae1000014","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1.5,"parentId":"3c9ca74df859a41312000010","content":"###**Pre Start-Up Checklist**"},{"_id":"3cb5039f0f6aca80be00001c","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cab51ec5cb626aae1000014","content":"* Check **Compressor Unit** is in Standard Working Order\n* Check **Extractor System** is in Standard Working Order\n* Clean the fenced area\n* Check **Coolant** levels"},{"_id":"3cab33115cb626aae1000010","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":2,"parentId":"3c9ca74df859a41312000010","content":"###**Turning ON the Machine**"},{"_id":"3cab34be5cb626aae1000011","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cab33115cb626aae1000010","content":"####**Step 1 @ CNC Console**"},{"_id":"3d2cd44ff38361c97a00008d","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cab34be5cb626aae1000011","content":"* Turn ON **Isolator Box**\n* Turn ON **CNC Console**\n* Press **NC ON Button** during boot-up\n - Wait for Software to boot-up before continuing\n* Release **Emergency Stop Button**\n* Press **Purple Reset Button**\n* Run **vncviewer** program on desktop\n* Click **Connect**\n* Allow **Labeling Machine** to boot-up"},{"_id":"3d2cd489f38361c97a00008e","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":2,"parentId":"3cab33115cb626aae1000010","content":"####** Step 2 @ Labeling Console**"},{"_id":"3d2cd540f38361c97a00008f","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d2cd489f38361c97a00008e","content":"* Run **Labeling Control** program on desktop\n* Click **Home**, to calibrate **Labeling Machine**\n* Press **Auto**, on **Scissor Lift Control 1 & 2**\n* Press **ON**, on **Photoelectric Barrier 1 & 2**"},{"_id":"3d2cd5bbf38361c97a000090","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":3,"parentId":"3cab33115cb626aae1000010","content":"####**Step 3 @ CNC Console**"},{"_id":"3d2cd730f38361c97a000091","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d2cd5bbf38361c97a000090","content":"* **Calibrate the Machine**. Refer\n* **Confirm the Tool**. Refer"},{"_id":"3cab35045cb626aae1000012","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":3,"parentId":"3c9ca74df859a41312000010","content":"###**Calibrating the Machine**"},{"_id":"3cab8a8e5cb626aae1000016","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cab35045cb626aae1000012","content":"* Turn **Mode Dial** to **Home**\n* Press **+Z Button**\n - Machine will automatically calibrate each axis\n* **-X, +Y, +Z Buttons** will illuminate when calibrated"},{"_id":"3cab99945cb626aae1000017","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":4,"parentId":"3c9ca74df859a41312000010","content":"###**Confirming the Tool**"},{"_id":"3caba2985cb626aae100001d","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cab99945cb626aae1000017","content":"* Turn **Mode Dial** to **DNC**\n* Run **Campro DNC** program on desktop\n* Click **User File**\n* Select & Open ** Tool Confirm** File\n* Click **Transfer**\n* **Tool 1 must be facing Spindle Head**\n - If **Tool 1** is not facing the **Spindle Head**. Refer to **Manually Changing Tools**\n* Press **Cycle Start Button**\n - Machine will confirm that the **Tools** are in the correct position"},{"_id":"3cb5b9d8959f5e7989000023","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":4.5,"parentId":"3c9ca74df859a41312000010","content":"###**Loading the Scissor Lifts**"},{"_id":"3cb70d57959f5e7989000024","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cb5b9d8959f5e7989000023","content":"* Manually Lower **Scissor Lift** to the lowest position\n* Load Pack onto **Scissor Lift**\n - **3600 x 1800 Sheets** are to be loaded on **Scissor Lift 1**\n - **2400 x 1200 Sheets** are to be loaded on **Scissor Lift 2**\n - Perform an **X Reference Detect** if necessary\n - **3100 x 1200 Sheets** are to be loaded on **Scissor Lift 2**\n - Perform an **X Reference Detect** if necessary\n - Packs must be loaded square with the guides\n - Packs must be on a **16mm coversheet**\n - Packs must not exceed height limit of 560mm\n - 34 Sheets of 16mm + Coversheet\n - 30 Sheets of 18mm + Coversheet\n* Press **AUTO** on **Scissor Lift Control**\n* Press **ON**, on the **Photoelectric Barrier**\n - **Scissor Lift** will automatically raise itself to the correct position\n\n\n**Scissor Lifts** will automatically lower when the last sheet has been removed from the pack & only the coversheet remains.\nThe **AUTO** Button on the **Scissor Lift Control**, along with the **ON** Button, on the **Photoelectric Barriers** must be active for the **Loading Machine** to operate."},{"_id":"3cab9aeb5cb626aae1000018","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":310285,"position":5,"parentId":"3c9ca74df859a41312000010","content":"###**Running a Job**"},{"_id":"3cb5afec959f5e7989000022","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":95474,"position":1,"parentId":"3cab9aeb5cb626aae1000018","content":"####**Pre-Operation Checklist**"},{"_id":"3d2cc021f38361c97a000077","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cb5afec959f5e7989000022","content":"* Machine is Calibrated\n* **Tools** have been Confirmed\n* **Machine Bed** is Empty\n* **Scissor Lifts** are ready"},{"_id":"3d2cc122f38361c97a000079","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":2,"parentId":"3cab9aeb5cb626aae1000018","content":"####**Running Jobs with Labels**"},{"_id":"3d2cc246f38361c97a00007a","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d2cc122f38361c97a000079","content":"* Run **Campro DNC** program on desktop\n* Turn **Mode Dial** to **DNC**\n* Select **Labeling and Cutting**\n* Click **Browse** under the heading **Database File**\n* Searching the **(R:) Drive**, open the folder for current job. Select & Open **.csv** file\n* Click **Multi Open**\n - This will automatically open to the current job file\n* Select & Open the required **.anc** files\n* Order the **.anc** files in the correct order by clicking the **Up** & **Down** buttons on **Campro DNC**\n* Change Values in the **Area** drop-down\n - Value **1** will load sheets from **Scissor Lift 1**\n - Value **2** will load sheets from **Scissor Lift 2**\n - Value **1 & 2** will load sheets from both **scissor lifts** alternately\n* Set **Feed Rate** to appropriate rate for material\n - **Feed Rate 100** for *Particleboard*. **Feed Rate 80** for **MDF**\n* **Vacuum Pumps** & **Automatic** must be ON\n* Click **Transfer**\n - This will start the job *immediately*. Make any changes before clicking **Transfer**\n* Allow Machine to operate automatically\n - Components will operate independently following a process. This process is dependant on the operator confirming the load & offload transfer of sheets\n* At completion of cutting, the **Machine Head** will sit stationary at the *Home Position*\n* Press **Green Cycle Start Button**\n - This will position the **Machine Head** for offloading. The **Labelling Machine** will pick up the next sheet & wait for the **Machine Bed **to be cleared\n* Press **Green Cycle Start Button**\n - The **Machine Head** will push off the current material & the **Labelling Machine** will load the next sheet. Once aligned, the **Machine** will operate to the process automatically\n"},{"_id":"3d2cc2b8f38361c97a00007b","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":3,"parentId":"3cab9aeb5cb626aae1000018","content":"####**Running Jobs without Labels**"},{"_id":"3d2cc3d9f38361c97a00007c","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d2cc2b8f38361c97a00007b","content":"* Run **Campro DNC** program on desktop\n* Turn **Mode Dial** to **DNC**\n* Select **Cutting Only**\n* Click **Browse** under the heading **Job Folder**\n* Searching the **(R:) Drive**, open the folder for current job. Click **OK**\n* Click **Multi Open**\n - This will automatically open to the current job file\n* Select & Open the required **.anc** files\n* Order the **.anc** files in the correct order by clicking the **Up** & **Down** buttons on **Campro DNC**\n* Change Values in the **Area** drop-down\n - Value **1** will load sheets from **Scissor Lift 1**\n - Value **2** will load sheets from **Scissor Lift 2**\n - Value **1 & 2** will load sheets from both **scissor lifts** alternately\n* Set **Feed Rate** to appropriate rate for material\n - **Feed Rate 100** for *Particleboard*. **Feed Rate 80** for **MDF**\n* **Vacuum Pumps** & **Automatic** must be ON\n* Click **Transfer**\n - This will start the job *immediately*. Make any changes before clicking **Transfer**\n* Allow Machine to operate automatically\n - Components will operate independently following a process. This process is dependant on the operator confirming the load & offload transfer of sheets\n* At completion of cutting, the **Machine Head** will sit stationary at the *Home Position*\n* Press **Green Cycle Start Button**\n - This will position the **Machine Head** for offloading. The **Labelling Machine** will pick up the next sheet & wait for the **Machine Bed **to be cleared\n* Press **Green Cycle Start Button**\n - The **Machine Head** will push off the current material & the **Labelling Machine** will load the next sheet. Once aligned, the **Machine** will operate to the process automatically\n"},{"_id":"3cb881efa21fc9f7e2000035","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":5.5,"parentId":"3c9ca74df859a41312000010","content":"###**Pausing/Resuming the Machine**"},{"_id":"3cb8826da21fc9f7e2000036","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cb881efa21fc9f7e2000035","content":"####**Pausing the Machine**"},{"_id":"3d2cc554f38361c97a00007d","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cb8826da21fc9f7e2000036","content":"* After current sheet has been routed & **Machine Head** is waiting to be positioned for offloading\n* Turn **OFF** Vacuum Pumps"},{"_id":"3d2cc56ff38361c97a00007e","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":2,"parentId":"3cb881efa21fc9f7e2000035","content":"####**Resuming the Machine**"},{"_id":"3d2cc57ef38361c97a00007f","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d2cc56ff38361c97a00007e","content":"* Turn ON **Vacuum Pumps**\n - Wait for all pumps to turn ON\n* Press **Green Cycle Start Button**"},{"_id":"3cab9bf35cb626aae1000019","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":6,"parentId":"3c9ca74df859a41312000010","content":"###**Turning OFF the Machine**"},{"_id":"3cabb0385cb626aae100001e","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cab9bf35cb626aae1000019","content":"####**Step 1 @ Labeling Console**"},{"_id":"3d2cd898f38361c97a000092","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cabb0385cb626aae100001e","content":"* Click **Home**\n - Allow machine to travel\n* Close **Labeling Program**\n* Turn OFF **Labeling Computer**"},{"_id":"3d2cd920f38361c97a000093","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":2,"parentId":"3cab9bf35cb626aae1000019","content":"####**Step 2 @ CNC Console**\n"},{"_id":"3d2cd9aff38361c97a000094","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d2cd920f38361c97a000093","content":"* Refer to **Unload the Tool**\n - A sheet must be on the **Spoil Board** when leaving the machine overnight\n* Close **Campro DNC**, **vncviewer**, **LabelIT**, & any other applications\n* Press **Emergency Stop Button**\n* Close **CNC Program**\n* Press **NC OFF Button**\n* Turn OFF **Computer**\n* Turn OFF **CNC Console**\n* Turn OFF **Main Isolator Switch**"},{"_id":"3cab9d825cb626aae100001a","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":7,"parentId":"3c9ca74df859a41312000010","content":"###**Unloading the Tool**"},{"_id":"3cb520bc0f6aca80be00001d","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cab9d825cb626aae100001a","content":"* Turn **Mode Dial** to **DNC**\n* Run **Campro DNC** program\n* Click **User File**\n* Select & Load ** Tool Unload** File\n* Click **Transfer**\n* Press **Cycle Start Button**\n - Machine will unload current tool, and park the **Machine Head** in the center\n* **Campro DNC** will alert the operator when complete"},{"_id":"3cab9df05cb626aae100001b","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":8,"parentId":"3c9ca74df859a41312000010","content":"###**Skimming the Spoil Board**"},{"_id":"3cb521f80f6aca80be00001e","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cab9df05cb626aae100001b","content":"* Turn **Mode Dial** to **DNC**\n* Run **Campro DNC** program\n* Click **User File**\n* Select & Load **Table Trim** File\n* Click **Transfer**\n* Set **Feed Rate** to **100**\n* Press **Cycle Start Button**\n - No Material should be on the **Spoil Board** during this process\n - Machine will now trim the **Spoil Board** .25mm\n* **Campro DNC** will alert Operator when complete"},{"_id":"3cab9fbd5cb626aae100001c","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":9,"parentId":"3c9ca74df859a41312000010","content":"###**Touching Off the Tool**"},{"_id":"3cb541410f6aca80be000044","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cab9fbd5cb626aae100001c","content":"* Turn **Mode Dial** to **DNC**\n* Run **Campro DNC** program\n* Click **User File**\n* Select & Load **AUTO MEASURE #** File\n - E.g. 101 is **Tool 1**, 102 is **Tool 2** etc.\n* Click **Transfer**\n* Set **Feed Rate** to **50**\n* Press **Cycle Start Button**\n - Machine will travel to **Touch Off Plate** & touch once\n* Press **Cycle Start Button**\n - Machine will now touch off a second time\n* **Campro DNC** will alert Operator when complete\n* Manually Calibrate the Machine\n - Refer to **Calibrating the Machine**"},{"_id":"3cc5957fbf455edcda00004c","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":9.5,"parentId":"3c9ca74df859a41312000010","content":"###**Offsetting a Tool**"},{"_id":"3cc595f4bf455edcda00004d","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cc5957fbf455edcda00004c","content":"* Open **CNC Screen Display Function**\n* Click **OFST**\n* Click # of desired **Tool**\n - E.g. 101 is **Tool 1 **, 102 is **Tool 2** etc.\n* Click **(OPRT)**\n* Type Adjust Value in mm\n - E.g. to adjust **Tool** down 0.25mm: -0.25\n - E.g. to adjust **Tool** up 0.25mm: 0.25\n* Click **+Input**\n - This will bring up a confirm option\n* Click **Can** to Cancel command. Click **Exec** to Execute command"},{"_id":"3ccfe2aadecd759e62000052","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":9.75,"parentId":"3c9ca74df859a41312000010","content":"###**Manually Changing Tools**"},{"_id":"3ccfe3b8decd759e62000053","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3ccfe2aadecd759e62000052","content":"* Turn **Mode Dial** to **JOG**\n* Open **Spindle Head Cover**"},{"_id":"3d2cc8a2f38361c97a000080","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":2,"parentId":"3ccfe2aadecd759e62000052","content":"####**Removing a Tool from the Spindle**"},{"_id":"3d2cc9bbf38361c97a000082","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d2cc8a2f38361c97a000080","content":"* Hold **Tool** in the **Spindle** with right hand\n* Press **Manual Tool Release** with left hand\n - The **Tool** should be released and can be pulled away from the **Spindle**"},{"_id":"3d2cc8e6f38361c97a000081","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":3,"parentId":"3ccfe2aadecd759e62000052","content":"####**Rotating & Loading the Tool Magazine**"},{"_id":"3d2ccaadf38361c97a000083","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d2cc8e6f38361c97a000081","content":"* Press the **Manual Rotate** Button\n - This will rotate the **Tool Magazine** clockwise once\n - Continue until desired **Tool Claw** is facing the **Load Flap**\n* Place **Tool** into the **Tool Claw**\n* Rotate until **Tool 1** is facing the **Spindle**\n - You must **Confirm the Tool** after manually adjusting **Tools**"},{"_id":"3d2ccb64f38361c97a000084","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":4,"parentId":"3ccfe2aadecd759e62000052","content":"* Close **Spindle Head Cover**\n* Press **Purple Reset Button**"},{"_id":"3cc3a2f9bf455edcda00004a","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":10,"parentId":"3c9ca74df859a41312000010","content":"###**Manually Printing Labels**"},{"_id":"3cc3a38abf455edcda00004b","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cc3a2f9bf455edcda00004a","content":"####**Opening the Program & Job**"},{"_id":"3d2ccf85f38361c97a000089","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cc3a38abf455edcda00004b","content":"* Run **LabelIT**\n* Click **Select**\n* Highlight **Select Job Path**\n* Click **Select**\n* Searching in **(N:) Drive**, Select & Open the job\n* Click **Open**"},{"_id":"3d2ccc4cf38361c97a000085","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":2,"parentId":"3cc3a2f9bf455edcda00004a","content":"####**To print a specific label**"},{"_id":"3d2cccfbf38361c97a000087","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d2ccc4cf38361c97a000085","content":"* Scroll to the correct sheet using the **Page Next** buttons\n* Highlight the part for labeling\n* Click **Print**"},{"_id":"3d2ccc66f38361c97a000086","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":3,"parentId":"3cc3a2f9bf455edcda00004a","content":"####**To print labels for a specific sheet**"},{"_id":"3d2cce16f38361c97a000088","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d2ccc66f38361c97a000086","content":"* Scroll to the correct sheet\n* Click **Print Sheet**"},{"_id":"3ccec539decd759e62000050","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":11,"parentId":"3c9ca74df859a41312000010","content":"###**Manually Loading a Sheet**"},{"_id":"3cceceabdecd759e62000051","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3ccec539decd759e62000050","content":"####**Loading a 3600 x 1800 sheet from Scissor Lift 1**"},{"_id":"3d2cd109f38361c97a00008a","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cceceabdecd759e62000051","content":" - This Process **must** be done at the **VNC Console**\n* Open **Labeling Control**\n* Enter **2800.00** in **Machine Position** for **X**\n* Click **Move X**\n* Click **No. 3 Forward**\n* Click **No. 1~3 Down**\n* Click **No. 1~3 Clamp ON**\n* Click **No. 1~3 Up**\n* Enter **13100.00** in **Machine Position** for **X**\n* Click **No. 1~3 Down**\n* Click **No. 1~3 Clamp OFF**\n* Click **No. 1~3 Up**\n* Click **No. 3 Back**\n* Click **HOME**\n\n**Reverse the order if taking Material from the Router Bed**"},{"_id":"3d2cd194f38361c97a00008b","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":2,"parentId":"3ccec539decd759e62000050","content":"####**Loading a 2400 x 1200 sheet from Scissor Lift 2**"},{"_id":"3d2cd1f9f38361c97a00008c","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d2cd194f38361c97a00008b","content":" - This Process **must** be done at the **VNC Console**\n* Open **Labeling Control**\n* Enter **7500.00** in **Machine Position** for **X**\n* Click **Move X**\n* Click **No. 1~3 Down**\n* Click **No. 1~3 Clamp ON**\n* Click **No. 1~3 Up**\n* Enter **12300.00** in **Machine Position** for **X**\n* Click **No. 1~3 Down**\n* Click **No. 1~3 Clamp OFF**\n* Click **No. 1~3 Up**\n* Click **HOME**\n\n**Reverse the order if taking Material from the Router Bed**"},{"_id":"3d2d6a195bf3534db90000c3","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":3,"parentId":"3ccec539decd759e62000050","content":"####**Loading a 3100 x 1200 sheet from Scissor Lift 2**"},{"_id":"3d041d0ac5503e792c000057","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":12,"parentId":"3c9ca74df859a41312000010","content":"###**Changing the X Detect on a Scissor Lift**"},{"_id":"3d041ee1c5503e792c000058","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d041d0ac5503e792c000057","content":"When loading the **Scissor Lifts** with a different length of board, an **X Reference Detect** must be performed.\n\n* Open **Campro DNC**\n* Under **Material Length** change the value on the drop down menu for the desired area\n - **Area 1** will change **Scissor Lift 1**, **Area 2** will change **Scissor Lift 2**\n* Open **vncviewer** or at the **Labeling Control** select the **Scissor Lift** you wish to modify by selecting **Area 1** or **Area 2**\n* Under the **Home Shift** heading, Click **Change**\n* Click **X Reference Detect**\n - Machine will locate the material"},{"_id":"3c9ca8d5f859a41312000011","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":2,"parentId":"3c9ca370f859a4131200000f","content":"##**Maintenance Procedure** "},{"_id":"3cb8bfffa21fc9f7e2000041","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3c9ca8d5f859a41312000011","content":"###**Daily Maintenance**"},{"_id":"3cc1a607bf455edcda000046","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cb8bfffa21fc9f7e2000041","content":"* Remove any debris/offcuts/scrap from the machine area\n* Excessive amounts of dust are swept up\n* All unnecessary objects are removed from the general area\n* Check **Coolant** levels on **Cooling Machine**"},{"_id":"3cb8af6ea21fc9f7e2000038","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":2,"parentId":"3c9ca8d5f859a41312000011","content":"###**Weekly Maintenance**"},{"_id":"3cb8b795a21fc9f7e200003c","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cb8af6ea21fc9f7e2000038","content":"Incorporate the **Daily Maintenance** & the following:"},{"_id":"3d2ce3e3f38361c97a000096","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":2,"parentId":"3cb8af6ea21fc9f7e2000038","content":"####**Spindle Head**"},{"_id":"3d2d094230793bf00900009d","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d2ce3e3f38361c97a000096","content":"* Blow down components with **Compressed Air**\n* 1-2 pumps per nipple (4 total) of **EP0**\n* Clean inside the **Spindle** with **Spindle Cleaning Tool**\n - Turn **Mode Dial** to **Jog**. Open **Router Head Cover**. Remove the **Tool** from the **Spindle** by pressing the **Tool Unlock Button**. Hold the **Tool Unlock Button** & insert the **Spindle Cleaning Tool**, make 5 rotations and remove."},{"_id":"3d2ce48cf38361c97a000097","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":3,"parentId":"3cb8af6ea21fc9f7e2000038","content":"####**Drill Component**"},{"_id":"3d2d0a2330793bf00900009e","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d2ce48cf38361c97a000097","content":"* Blow down components with **Compressed Air**\n* **Rise & Fall**: 1-2 pumps per nipple (4 total) of **UniLube**\n* **Drill Block**: 1 pumps per nipple (5 total) of **UniLube**"},{"_id":"3d2ce801f38361c97a000098","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":4,"parentId":"3cb8af6ea21fc9f7e2000038","content":"####**Vacuum Pumps**"},{"_id":"3d2d0ab430793bf00900009f","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d2ce801f38361c97a000098","content":"* Blow down components with **Compressed Air**\n* Blow down **Snorkel Filters** (3 total) with **Compressed Air**\n* Blow down **VNC computer filters** (2 total)"},{"_id":"3d2ce870f38361c97a000099","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":5,"parentId":"3cb8af6ea21fc9f7e2000038","content":"####**Labeling/Loading Head**"},{"_id":"3d2d0b7a30793bf0090000a0","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":2128124,"position":1,"parentId":"3d2ce870f38361c97a000099","content":"* Blow down components with **Compressed Air**\n* **Grease Block**: 2-3 pumps per nipple (8 total) of **EP0**\n* **Stamp Head**: 1-2 pumps on the nipple of **EP0**\n* **Alignment Cup**: 1-2 pumps per nipple (2 total) of **EP0**\n* **Extension Frame**: 1-2 pumps per nipple (4 total) of **EP0**"},{"_id":"3d2d04eb30793bf009000099","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":8,"parentId":"3cb8af6ea21fc9f7e2000038","content":"####**Guide Rails**"},{"_id":"3d2d0c6f30793bf0090000a1","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":2128669,"position":1,"parentId":"3d2d04eb30793bf009000099","content":"- Spray *all* **Guide Rails** with **WD40** and wipe down with rags\n* **Label Machine Guide Rail Bearings**: 2-3 pumps per nipple (8 total) of **EP0**"},{"_id":"3d2d071030793bf00900009a","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":9,"parentId":"3cb8af6ea21fc9f7e2000038","content":"####**Scissor Lifts**"},{"_id":"3d2d0d1530793bf0090000a2","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d2d071030793bf00900009a","content":"* Blow down components with **Compressed Air**\n* Check **Hydraulic Fluid Level**\n - If below **Red Line**, call for Professional Assistance\n* Dust **Lift Sensors**"},{"_id":"3d2d079630793bf00900009b","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":10,"parentId":"3cb8af6ea21fc9f7e2000038","content":"####**Coolant Machine**"},{"_id":"3d2d0dc330793bf0090000a3","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d2d079630793bf00900009b","content":"* Blow down components with **Compressed Air**\n* Blow down **Fan Filter**"},{"_id":"3d2d082c30793bf00900009c","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":11,"parentId":"3cb8af6ea21fc9f7e2000038","content":"####**CNC Console**"},{"_id":"3d2d0e3e30793bf0090000a4","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d2d082c30793bf00900009c","content":"* Blow down components with **Compressed Air**\n* Lightly blow down rear **Air Filters**"},{"_id":"3d2d1d1230793bf0090000a5","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":12,"parentId":"3cb8af6ea21fc9f7e2000038","content":"####**Pop-Up Pins**"},{"_id":"3d2d206230793bf0090000ac","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d2d1d1230793bf0090000a5","content":"* Vacuum or blow away dust\n* Spray with **WD40** wipe away with rag\n* Spray with **Silicone Spray**"},{"_id":"3cb8afbba21fc9f7e2000039","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":3,"parentId":"3c9ca8d5f859a41312000011","content":"###**Monthly Maintenance**"},{"_id":"3cb8b8a6a21fc9f7e200003d","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cb8afbba21fc9f7e2000039","content":"Incorporate the **Daily Maintenance**, **Weekly/Fortnightly Maintenance** & the following:"},{"_id":"3d2d1da230793bf0090000a6","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":3,"parentId":"3cb8afbba21fc9f7e2000039","content":"####**Track Treads**"},{"_id":"3d2d1fe730793bf0090000ab","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d2d1da230793bf0090000a6","content":"Spray with **WD40** then blow down with compressed air"},{"_id":"3d2d1df930793bf0090000a7","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":4,"parentId":"3cb8afbba21fc9f7e2000039","content":"####**Conveyor Lifts**"},{"_id":"3d2d1f7b30793bf0090000aa","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d2d1df930793bf0090000a7","content":"1 pump per nipple (2 total) of **UniLube**"},{"_id":"3d2d1e9830793bf0090000a8","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":5,"parentId":"3cb8afbba21fc9f7e2000039","content":"####**Loader Head Suction Cups**"},{"_id":"3d2d1f0c30793bf0090000a9","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d2d1e9830793bf0090000a8","content":"* Spray each pin with **WD40** & clean with rag\n* Spray with **Silicone Spray**"},{"_id":"3cb8b136a21fc9f7e200003a","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":4,"parentId":"3c9ca8d5f859a41312000011","content":"###**Quarterly Maintenance**"},{"_id":"3cb8bb57a21fc9f7e200003e","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cb8b136a21fc9f7e200003a","content":"Incorporate the **Daily Maintenance**, **Weekly/Fortnightly Maintenance**, **Monthly Maintenance** & the following: "},{"_id":"3d2d22cf30793bf0090000ad","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":2,"parentId":"3cb8b136a21fc9f7e200003a","content":"####**Vacuum Pumps**"},{"_id":"3d2d236330793bf0090000ae","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d2d22cf30793bf0090000ad","content":"Blow down **Secondary Filters (3 total)** with **Compressed Air**"},{"_id":"3cb8b1bba21fc9f7e200003b","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":5,"parentId":"3c9ca8d5f859a41312000011","content":"###**Half Yearly Maintenance**"},{"_id":"3cb8bee7a21fc9f7e2000040","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cb8b1bba21fc9f7e200003b","content":"Incorporate the **Daily Maintenance**, **Weekly/Fortnightly Maintenance**, **Monthly Maintenance**, **Quarterly Maintenance** & the following: "},{"_id":"3d2d288430793bf0090000b1","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1.5,"parentId":"3cb8b1bba21fc9f7e200003b","content":"####**Carbon Vanes**"},{"_id":"3d2d297630793bf0090000b2","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d2d288430793bf0090000b1","content":"**Carbon Vanes** inside **Vacuum Pumps** must be removed, measure, and reported on condition by a **Technician**"},{"_id":"3d2d24c830793bf0090000af","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":2,"parentId":"3cb8b1bba21fc9f7e200003b","content":"####**Vacuum Pumps**"},{"_id":"3d2d251430793bf0090000b0","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d2d24c830793bf0090000af","content":"Grease **Vacuum Pumps** using **Becker Lubricant** 1 pump per nipple (1 per **Vacuum Pump**, 3 total)"},{"_id":"3dca7268285760784e0000c5","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":6,"parentId":"3c9ca8d5f859a41312000011","content":"###**Implementing Software Updates**"},{"_id":"3dca72c1285760784e0000c6","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3dca7268285760784e0000c5","content":"####**Updating Labelling Control**"},{"_id":"3dca7b56285760784e0000c7","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":2,"parentId":"3dca7268285760784e0000c5","content":"####**Updating Campro DNC**"},{"_id":"3cab1f265cb626aae100000f","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":3,"parentId":"3c9ca370f859a4131200000f","content":"##**Troubleshooting**"},{"_id":"3cb876a2a21fc9f7e200002e","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cab1f265cb626aae100000f","content":"###**Photo Cell Alarm**"},{"_id":"3cc5d6dbbf455edcda00004f","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cb876a2a21fc9f7e200002e","content":"The **Optic Beam** on the **Photoelectric Barriers** have been tripped.\nThis is a safety precaution and will not cause severe interruptions.\n\nReset the **Optic Beam** by pressing the **ON Button**, on the **Photoelectric Barriers**"},{"_id":"3cb87a1aa21fc9f7e200002f","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":2,"parentId":"3cab1f265cb626aae100000f","content":"###**Material Loading Error**"},{"_id":"3cc5ed68bf455edcda000051","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cb87a1aa21fc9f7e200002f","content":"The **Loading Machine** has attempted to lift material off a **Scissor Lift** but failed. The **Material Presence Sensor** has detected that no material was lifted and paused the process.\n\nTo fix the problem, turn ON **Vacuum Pumps** and click **Resume** on **vncviewer**"},{"_id":"3cb87a99a21fc9f7e2000030","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":3,"parentId":"3cab1f265cb626aae100000f","content":"###**Single Print Error**"},{"_id":"3cc5f432bf455edcda000052","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cb87a99a21fc9f7e2000030","content":"The **Network Connection** between **VNC Console** & **CNC Console** has been lost.\n\n* Refer to **Shutting Down the Machine**\n* Refer to **Starting Up the Machine**"},{"_id":"3cb87bb5a21fc9f7e2000031","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":4,"parentId":"3cab1f265cb626aae100000f","content":"###**Readfile Error**"},{"_id":"3d20260d8d05e1c3b8000075","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cb87bb5a21fc9f7e2000031","content":"The **Labeling System** cannot access the database.\n\n* Close **Campro DNC**\n* Close **Labeling Control** \n - Allow 30 second reset\n* Open **Labeling Control**\n* Click **Home**\n* Refer to **Running a Job**"},{"_id":"3cb87c76a21fc9f7e2000032","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":5,"parentId":"3cab1f265cb626aae100000f","content":"###**Paper Jam**"},{"_id":"3d202e4e8d05e1c3b8000076","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cb87c76a21fc9f7e2000032","content":"Internal Printer Error, label may have become jammed internally.\n\n* Open **Labeling Control**\n* Click **Service Position**\n* Open **Labeling Machine**\n* Setup the **Sticker Roll**\n* Click **Home** on **Labeling Control**"},{"_id":"4051a4e21f286efa940000f1","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":6,"parentId":"3cab1f265cb626aae100000f","content":"###**No Ribbon**"},{"_id":"4051a5c41f286efa940000f2","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4051a4e21f286efa940000f1","content":"Two causes can trigger this alarm.\n\n* The **Ink Ribbon** has run out & needs replacing\n* The tail on the **Label Roll** has jammed\n * Rewind the **Label Roll** & thread it properly"},{"_id":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":7,"parentId":"3cab1f265cb626aae100000f","content":"###**CNC Error Codes**"},{"_id":"4052ac4e1f286efa940000f5","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2100 (2000) (A0.0) SPINDLE UP SENSOR ALARM\n"},{"_id":"4052ad621f286efa940000f6","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4052ac4e1f286efa940000f5","content":"Check the Sensor on the Spindle Cylinder\n* If light is ON: Wire is loose\n* If light is OFF:Check if spindle is in correct position\n - May be obstructed by objects.\n - Water in the airlines\n - Sensor may need adjusting\n - Faulty Sensor"},{"_id":"4052adaf1f286efa940000f7","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":2,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2101 (2001) (A0.1) COVER LOCK ALARM\n"},{"_id":"4052ae7a1f286efa940000f8","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4052adaf1f286efa940000f7","content":"Machine thinks Safety Hood is open.\n\nClose Safety Hood & press the Purple Reset Button\nIf alarm doesn't clear:\n * Loose/Bad connection between switch and computer\n * Faulty safety switch"},{"_id":"4052af6b1f286efa940000f9","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":3,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2102 (2002) (A0.2) Z AXIS ZERO RETURN"},{"_id":"4052af831f286efa940000fa","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":4,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2103 (2003) (A0.3) SAFETY BARRIERS ALARM\n\n"},{"_id":"4052b0721f286efa940000fb","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4052af831f286efa940000fa","content":"Photoelectric Barriers were tripped.\n\nPress Green Cycle Start Button to resume"},{"_id":"4052b0a61f286efa940000fc","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":5,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2104 (2004) (A0.4) OMLET MOTOR PROBE SENSOR ALARM\n\n"},{"_id":"4052b2a81f286efa940000fd","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4052b0a61f286efa940000fc","content":"The thermal sensor inside the spindle has overheated.\n\nCall a technician. Check for:\n- Failed bearing\n- Overload during cutting\n- Thermal sensor faulty\n- Loose wire or connection"},{"_id":"4052b4091f286efa940000fe","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":6,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2105 (2005) (A0.5) #1 PMM SERVO DRIVER NOT READY\n\n"},{"_id":"4052b4481f286efa940000ff","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4052b4091f286efa940000fe","content":"The PMM tool carousel motor driver is loose the reference signal or other alarm shows up. And the possible reason could be:\n-\tThe voltage of Battery, which located on the PMM servo driver, is too low and loose the reference signal. Re-calibrate the reference point will clear the alarm. And replace the battery if possible\n-\tLoose wire or connector\n-\tServo driver defected"},{"_id":"4052b4841f286efa94000100","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":7,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2106 (2006) (A0.6) SKIP SIGNAL ALARM"},{"_id":"4052b54e1f286efa94000101","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4052b4841f286efa94000100","content":"The tool touch off signal is not works accordingly and the possible reason could be:\n-\tThe tool length setting of tool touch off parameters is been set too long \n-\tThe sensor of tool touch off device is defected\n-\tLoose wire or connector."},{"_id":"4052b58a1f286efa94000102","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":8,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2107 (2007) (A0.7) THERMO OF INVERTER BRAKE\n"},{"_id":"4052b81b1f286efa94000103","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4052b58a1f286efa94000102","content":"The signal of the inverter brake thermo sensor is been activated and the possible reason could be:\n-\tFaulty thermo sensor \n-\tLoose wire or connection of signal\n-\tFaulty braking unit\n-\tFaulty inverter\n-\tFaulty spindle\n"},{"_id":"4052b8561f286efa94000104","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":9,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2110 (2010) (A1.0) #1 SP T.C. NOT COMPLETE\n"},{"_id":"4052b98c1f286efa94000105","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4052b8561f286efa94000104","content":"Tool change did not complete. Turn Mode Selection Switch to Jog mode and depress TM Rotation button to return tool changer to “Park Position”. Reference “Z” axis and re-confirm the tool."},{"_id":"4052b9ce1f286efa94000106","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":10,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2111 (2011) (A1.1) #2 VACUUM PRESSURE ALARM\n"},{"_id":"4052baa21f286efa94000107","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4052b9ce1f286efa94000106","content":"Vacuum pressure of zone 2 is low. Cover open area of table, corners of spoilboard not vacuumed down, gasket rolled out of channel or stretched too far when installed, dirty filters on pump. If all of these are good, remove spoilboard and plug all ports then turn on vacuum. Vacuum gauge should read @ 22 In. HG. If reading is good then problem with gasket, etc."},{"_id":"4052bd961f286efa94000108","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":11,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2112 (2012) (A1.2) #1 VACUUM PRESSURE ALARM\n\n"},{"_id":"4052bde01f286efa94000109","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4052bd961f286efa94000108","content":"Vacuum pressure of zone1 is low. Cover open area of table, corners of spoilboard not vacuumed down, gasket rolled out of channel or stretched too far when installed, dirty filters on pump. If all of these are good, remove spoilboard and plug all ports then turn on vacuum. Vacuum gauge should read @ 22 In. HG. If reading is good then problem with gasket, etc."},{"_id":"4052be841f286efa9400010a","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":12,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2113 (2013) (A1.3) INVERTER ALARM\n\n"},{"_id":"4052beee1f286efa9400010b","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4052be841f286efa9400010a","content":"Over current alarm on the spindle inverter, too deep of a cut, or diameter of cutter too large, bad inverter or Q1 breaker tripped. Press STOP/RESET button on invert and reset the alarm."},{"_id":"4052bf231f286efa9400010c","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":13,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2114 (2014) (A1.4) OVERLOAD ALARM\n"},{"_id":"4052bfd21f286efa9400010d","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4052bf231f286efa9400010c","content":"Check overloads in electric drawer (OL 20, OL21, OL42 & OL52). Depress blue tab on top of overload to reset. Reset alarm."},{"_id":"4052c0551f286efa9400010e","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":14,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2115 (2015) (A1.5) OIL AND LUBE ALARM\n"},{"_id":"4052c11e1f286efa9400010f","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4052c0551f286efa9400010e","content":"Check oil level on oiler. Refill."},{"_id":"4052c1561f286efa94000110","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":15,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2116 (2016) (A1.6) AIR PRESSURE ALARM\n"},{"_id":"4052c5cb1f286efa94000111","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4052c1561f286efa94000110","content":"Low air pressure, open air valve, check air supply.\n"},{"_id":"4052c6941f286efa94000112","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":16,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2117 (2017) (A1.7) Z AXIS STOPPER SENSOR ALARM\n"},{"_id":"4052c6d81f286efa94000113","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4052c6941f286efa94000112","content":"Sensor on air cylinder for “Z” axis lock is not detecting. Check travel of cylinder, air pressure, may need to adjust sensor, faulty sensor.\n"},{"_id":"4052c70e1f286efa94000114","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":17,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2120 (2020) (A2.0) # 1 SPINDLE TOOL CLAMP UP SENSOR"},{"_id":"4052c7c71f286efa94000115","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4052c70e1f286efa94000114","content":"Dirty spindle, clean either tool holder or inside of spindle with cleaner in tool kit, faulty sensor in spindle, tool change height may need adjusted. If cleaning tool holder and spindle taper does not clear the alarm, contact service."},{"_id":"4052c9db1f286efa94000116","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":18,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2121 (2021) (A2.1) #1 TM FORWARD SENSOR\n\n"},{"_id":"4052ca291f286efa94000117","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4052c9db1f286efa94000116","content":"TM Forward Sensor on Tool Magazine air cylinder is not detecting. Check for obstruction that would prevent the tool magazine from extending completely under the spindle, dirty guides, water in lines, loose screws on dust cover on center hub of tool magazine. The sensor may need adjustment or replacement if the tool changer is traveling the full distance."},{"_id":"4052cb001f286efa94000118","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":19,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2122 (2022) (A2.2) #1 TM BACKWARD SENSOR"},{"_id":"4052cb541f286efa94000119","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4052cb001f286efa94000118","content":"TM Backward Sensor on Tool Magazine air cylinder is not detecting. Check for obstruction that would prevent the tool magazine from returning completely to “Park Position”, dirty guides, water in lines, loose screws on dust cover on centre hub of tool magazine. The sensor may need adjustment or replacement if the tool changer is travelling the full distance."},{"_id":"4052cc681f286efa9400011a","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":20,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2123 (2023) (A2.3) TM UP SENSOR\n"},{"_id":"4052cca11f286efa9400011b","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4052cc681f286efa9400011a","content":"Check sensor on cylinder for led light. If light is on, loose wire. If light is off, is spindle all the way up? If cylinder is not all the way up, check for obstructions that the cylinder may be stuck on, water in air lines, sensor may need adjustment, faulty sensor.\n"},{"_id":"4052ce261f286efa9400011c","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":21,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2124 (2024) (A2.4) TM DOWN SENSOR\n"},{"_id":"4052ce9d1f286efa9400011d","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4052ce261f286efa9400011c","content":"Check sensor on cylinder for led light. If light is on, loose wire. If light is off, is spindle all the way down? If cylinder is not all the way down, check for obstructions that the cylinder may be stuck on, water in air lines, sensor may need adjustment, faulty sensor.\n"},{"_id":"4052ceda1f286efa9400011e","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":22,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2125 (2025) (A2.5) TM COUNTER SENSOR(OPTIONAL)\n\n"},{"_id":"4052cf901f286efa9400011f","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4052ceda1f286efa9400011e","content":"The TM counter sensor is not works accordingly and the possible reason could be:\n-\tThe sensor location is out and need to be adjusted\n-\tFaulty sensor\n-\tLoose wire or connection\n"},{"_id":"4052d14a1f286efa94000120","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":23,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2126 (2026) (A2.6) TM SENSOR alarm\n"},{"_id":"4052d2131f286efa94000121","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4052d14a1f286efa94000120","content":"One or more sensor of TM is malfunction and need to be adjust accordingly.\n"},{"_id":"4052d35b1f286efa94000122","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":24,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2127 (2027) (A2.7) #1 TOOL NUMBER INCORRECT\n\n"},{"_id":"4052d3f71f286efa94000123","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4052d35b1f286efa94000122","content":"Call of incorrect tool number in program, Ex. instead of T101 calling T01. Tool numbers must be between 101 and 112. Modify program with correct tool number."},{"_id":"4052d4c81f286efa94000124","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":25,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2130 (2030) (A3.0) #1 T.C. ALARM\n\n"},{"_id":"4052d5471f286efa94000125","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4052d4c81f286efa94000124","content":"#1 Tool change did not complete. Turn Mode Selection Switch to Jog mode and depress TM Rotation button to return tool changer to “Park Position”. Reference “Z” axis and re-confirm the tool."},{"_id":"4052d6f61f286efa94000126","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":26,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2131 (2031) (A3.1) #1 TM ROTATE NOT COMPLETE\n"},{"_id":"4052d7941f286efa94000127","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4052d6f61f286efa94000126","content":"Check for obstructions that would prevent tool magazine from completing rotation. Switch to jog mode rotate tool changer manually with button, then re-confirm the tool.\n"},{"_id":"4052d7cd1f286efa94000128","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":27,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2132 (2032) (A3.2) #1 TOOL NUMBER MUST PRESET\n"},{"_id":"4052d9ca1f286efa94000129","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4052d7cd1f286efa94000128","content":"Re-confirm the tool\n"},{"_id":"4052df9a1f286efa9400012a","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":28,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2133 (2033) (A3.3) #1 SPINDLE STOP DELAY\n\n"},{"_id":"4052e0981f286efa9400012b","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4052df9a1f286efa9400012a","content":"Coast down time of spindle is too long, too large of cutter, or bad inverter. Contact Service"},{"_id":"4052e1121f286efa9400012c","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":29,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2134 (2034) (A3.4) #1 SPINDLE UP SENSOR ALARM\n\n"},{"_id":"4052e2101f286efa9400012d","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4052e1121f286efa9400012c","content":"Check sensor on cylinder for led light. If light is on, loose wire. If light is off, is spindle all the way up? If spindle is not all the way up, check for obstructions that the spindle may be stuck on, water in air lines, sensor may need adjustment, faulty sensor."},{"_id":"4052e2441f286efa9400012e","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":30,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2135 (2035) (A3.5) #1 SPINDLE BRUSH UP SENSOR\n"},{"_id":"405309861f286efa9400012f","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4052e2441f286efa9400012e","content":"Check sensor on cylinder for led light. If light is on, loose wire. If light is off, is brush all the way up? If brush is not all the way up, check for obstructions that the brush may be stuck on, water in air lines, sensor may need adjustment, faulty sensor. \n"},{"_id":"405309b21f286efa94000130","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":31,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2136 (2036) (A3.6) #1 SP. TOOL CLAMP DOWN SENSOR\n\n"},{"_id":"40530a661f286efa94000131","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"405309b21f286efa94000130","content":"Detects draw bar down, remove tool holder from spindle and check for debris in tool holder, or bad sensor"},{"_id":"40530ad61f286efa94000132","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":32,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2137 (2037) (A3.7) Z HOME OR Z CONFIRM ERROR\n\n"},{"_id":"40530bf81f286efa94000133","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"40530ad61f286efa94000132","content":"Bad switch / broken wire or loose cam on z axis confirm switch. Call service"},{"_id":"40530c2d1f286efa94000134","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":33,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2140 (2040 (A4.0) SAW 0 DEGREE SENSOR ALARM(OPTIONAL)\n"},{"_id":"40530cfa1f286efa94000135","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"40530c2d1f286efa94000134","content":"Saw 0 degree sensor is not activated accordingly and the possible reason could be:\n-\tSaw is not been turn to 0 degree properly or stuck\n-\tSaw 0 degree sensor is out \n-\tSensor need be re-adjust or Faulty sensor\n-\tLoose wire or connection\n"},{"_id":"40530d521f286efa94000136","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":34,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2141 (2041) (A4.1) SAW 90 DEGREE SENSOR ALARM(OPTIONAL)\n\n"},{"_id":"40530e211f286efa94000137","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"40530d521f286efa94000136","content":"Saw 90 degree sensor is not activated accordingly and the possible reason could be:\n-\tSaw is not been turn to 0 degree properly or stuck\n-\tSaw 90 degree sensor is out \n-\tFaulty sensor\n-\tLoose wire or connection"},{"_id":"40530e9a1f286efa94000138","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":35,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2142 (2042) (A4.2) Y HOME OR Y CONFIRM ERROR\n\n"},{"_id":"40530f7a1f286efa94000139","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"40530e9a1f286efa94000138","content":"Bad switch / broken wire or loose cam on Y axis confirm switch. Call service"},{"_id":"40530fe31f286efa9400013a","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":36,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2143 (2043) (A4.3) DUST PIPE SENSOR ALARM\n"},{"_id":"405310751f286efa9400013b","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"40530fe31f286efa9400013a","content":"Bad sensor / broken wire or dust gate stuck."},{"_id":"405311091f286efa9400013c","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":37,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2144 (2044) (A4.4) COOLING SYSTEM ALARM\n\n"},{"_id":"405311d21f286efa9400013d","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"405311091f286efa9400013c","content":"The spindle cooling unit is not functioning properly and response to the error code with the suggested reaction on the sticker."},{"_id":"405312461f286efa9400013e","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":38,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2145 (2045) (A4.5) #1 T.M. OPEN SENSOR(OPTIONAL)\n\n"},{"_id":"405314df1f286efa9400013f","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"405312461f286efa9400013e","content":"Bad sensor / broken wire or TM cover is stuck"},{"_id":"405315191f286efa94000140","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":39,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2146 (2046) (A4.6) SP. SPEED REACH ALARM\n"},{"_id":"4053158f1f286efa94000141","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"405315191f286efa94000140","content":"Spindle did not reach set speed in specified interval: too large of cutter, low voltage to machine, faulty inverter. Call service."},{"_id":"405317671f286efa94000142","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":40,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2147 (2047) (A4.7) REMOTE BOX ENABLE\n"},{"_id":"405318151f286efa94000143","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"405317671f286efa94000142","content":"Remote box has been enabled\n"},{"_id":"405318401f286efa94000144","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":41,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2150 (2050) (A5.0) #2 SPINDLE UP SENSOR ALARM\n\n"},{"_id":"405318d01f286efa94000145","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"405318401f286efa94000144","content":"Check sensor on cylinder for led light. If light is on, loose wire. If light is off, is spindle all the way up? If spindle is not all the way up, check for obstructions that the spindle may be stuck on, water in air lines, sensor may need adjustment, faulty sensor."},{"_id":"405319031f286efa94000146","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":42,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2151 (2051) (A5.1) VACUUM CLAMP BEING OFF\n\n"},{"_id":"405319a11f286efa94000147","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"405319031f286efa94000146","content":"The vacuum clamp cannot activate and the machine cannot run on AUTO."},{"_id":"405326041f286efa94000148","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":43,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2152 (2052) (A5.2) #2 PMM SERVO DRIVER NOT READY\n\n"},{"_id":"405326501f286efa94000149","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"405326041f286efa94000148","content":"The #2 PMM tool carousel motor driver is loose the reference signal or other alarm shows up. And the possible reason could be:\n-\tThe voltage of Battery, which located on the PMM servo driver, is too low and loose the reference signal. Re-calibrate the reference point will clear the alarm. And replace the battery if possible\n-\tLoose wire or connector\n-\tServo driver defected"},{"_id":"405326b91f286efa9400014a","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":44,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2153 (2053) (A5.3) PMM AXIS ALARM(OPTIONAL)\n\n"},{"_id":"405327941f286efa9400014b","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"405326b91f286efa9400014a","content":"The PMM axis motor driver is loose the reference signal or other alarm shows up. And the possible reason could be:\n-\tThe voltage of Battery, which located on the PMM servo driver, is too low and loose the reference signal. Re-calibrate the reference point will clear the alarm. And replace the battery if possible\n-\tLoose wire or connector\n-\tServo driver defected"},{"_id":"405327d21f286efa9400014c","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":45,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2154 (2054) (A5.4) #2 TM ROTATE NOT COMPLETE\n"},{"_id":"405328f81f286efa9400014d","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"405327d21f286efa9400014c","content":"Check for obstructions that would prevent tool magazine from completing rotation. Switch to jog mode rotate tool changer manually with button, then re-confirm the tool."},{"_id":"405329561f286efa9400014e","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":46,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2155 (2055) (A5.5) #2 TM FORWARD SENSOR\n\n"},{"_id":"405329ee1f286efa9400014f","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"405329561f286efa9400014e","content":"TM Forward Sensor on Tool Magazine air cylinder is not detecting. Check for obstruction that would prevent the tool magazine from extending completely under the spindle, dirty guides, water in lines, loose screws on dust cover on center hub of tool magazine. The sensor may need adjustment or replacement if the tool changer is travelling the full distance."},{"_id":"40532af01f286efa94000150","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":47,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2156 (2056) (A5.6) #2 TM BACKWARD SENSOR\n"},{"_id":"40532b381f286efa94000151","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"40532af01f286efa94000150","content":"TM Backward Sensor on Tool Magazine air cylinder is not detecting. Check for obstruction that would prevent the tool magazine from returning completely to “Park Position”, dirty guides, water in lines, loose screws on dust cover on center hub of tool magazine. The sensor may need adjustment or replacement if the tool changer is traveling the full distance."},{"_id":"40532b731f286efa94000152","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":48,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2157 (2057) (A5.7) #2 TM SENSOR ALARM\n\n"},{"_id":"40532c6e1f286efa94000153","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"40532b731f286efa94000152","content":"one or more of the TM sensors is not functioning properly"},{"_id":"405332df1f286efa94000154","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":49,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2160 (2060) (A6.0) OFF-LOADING DEVICE UP SENSOR\n\n"},{"_id":"405333621f286efa94000155","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"405332df1f286efa94000154","content":"Off-loading conveyer up limit switch alarm is activated by:\n-\tConveyer is too far from vacuum table\n-\tLimit switch need be re-adjust or Faulty limit switch\n-\tLoose wire or connection"},{"_id":"405336151f286efa94000156","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":50,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2161 (2061) (A6.1) CRASHPROOF ALARM (1)\n"},{"_id":"405336ba1f286efa94000157","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"405336151f286efa94000156","content":"The nc machine is move into crashproof zone which located about 1 meter in reference side of X axis direction. \n"},{"_id":"405336f01f286efa94000158","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":51,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2162 (2062) (A6.2) LIFTING MOTOR OVERLOAD (1)\n\n"},{"_id":"405337ca1f286efa94000159","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"405336f01f286efa94000158","content":"The overload of motor on no.1 lifting table is activated by the possible reason of:\n-\tFaulty motor\n-\tLoose wire or connection\n-\tMechanical stuck of lifting table "},{"_id":"405337fe1f286efa9400015a","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":52,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2163 (2063) (A6.3) CONVEYER STOP MESSAGE\n"},{"_id":"405338801f286efa9400015b","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"405337fe1f286efa9400015a","content":"conveyer stop signal is been activated by the panel or sensor is faulty or wire loose.\n"},{"_id":"405338f51f286efa9400015c","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":53,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2164 (2064) (A6.4) CONVEYER INVERTER ALARM\n\n"},{"_id":"405339bd1f286efa9400015d","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"405338f51f286efa9400015c","content":"The ready signal of conveyer inverter is OFF and the possible reason could be:\n-\tMotor stuck or faulty\n-\tFaulty inverter\n-\tLoose wire or connection"},{"_id":"40533a101f286efa9400015e","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":54,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2165 (2065) (A6.5) SAFETY POSITION ERROR\n\n"},{"_id":"40533a801f286efa9400015f","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"40533a101f286efa9400015e","content":"The NC machine is not been park to the end of table while labeling machine is reach to NC machine side or the safety confirm signal is off by faulty sensor, loose wire/connection "},{"_id":"40533ab21f286efa94000160","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":55,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2166 (2066) (A6.6) CONVEYER MOTOR OVERLOAD\n"},{"_id":"40533b781f286efa94000161","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"40533ab21f286efa94000160","content":"The overload of motor on conveyer table is activated by the possible reason of:\n-\tFaulty motor\n-\tLoose wire or connection\n-\tMechanical stuck of lifting table \n"},{"_id":"40533bce1f286efa94000162","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":56,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2167 (2067 (A6.7)LIFTING MOTOR OVERLOAD (2)\n"},{"_id":"40533ca01f286efa94000163","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"40533bce1f286efa94000162","content":"The overload of motor on no.2 lifting table is activated by the possible reason of:\n-\tFaulty motor\n-\tLoose wire or connection\n-\tMechanical stuck of lifting table \n"},{"_id":"40533cde1f286efa94000164","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":57,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2170 (2070) (A7.0) FENCE DOWN SENSOR ALARM\n\n"},{"_id":"40533d741f286efa94000165","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"40533cde1f286efa94000164","content":"Pop up pins are not all down, sensor on one of the pins needs adjustment, bad sensor."},{"_id":"40533d9a1f286efa94000166","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":58,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2171 (2071) (A7.1) AXIS GREASE LUBE ALARM\n"},{"_id":"40533e701f286efa94000167","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"40533d9a1f286efa94000166","content":"Check grease oil level on central grease lub. unit Refill.\n"},{"_id":"405340751f286efa94000168","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":59,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2172 (2072) (A7.2) #1 SPINDLE DOWN SENSOR ALARM\n\n"},{"_id":"405340b31f286efa94000169","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"405340751f286efa94000168","content":"Check sensor on cylinder for led light. If light is on, loose wire. If light is off, is spindle all the way up? If spindle is not all the way up, check for obstructions that the spindle may be stuck on, water in air lines, sensor may need adjustment, faulty sensor."},{"_id":"405340de1f286efa9400016a","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":60,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2173 (2073) (A7.3) CRASHPROOF ALARM (2)\n"},{"_id":"405341821f286efa9400016b","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"405340de1f286efa9400016a","content":"one of crashproof sensor on lifting table, which located on the top of material high sensor is activated abnormally and remove the obstruction from sensing area \n"},{"_id":"405341a91f286efa9400016c","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":61,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2176 (2076) (A7.6) SAW NOT IN UP ALARM (OPTIONAL)\n\n"},{"_id":"4053426f1f286efa9400016d","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"405341a91f286efa9400016c","content":"Saw is not retreat to up position and the possible reason could be:\n-\tNo lubrication on oiler\n-\tMechanical stuck\n-\tSensor need be re-adjust or Faulty sensor\n-\tLoose wire or connection"},{"_id":"405342961f286efa9400016e","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":62,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2177 (2077) (A7.7) COVER CURTAIN UP SENSOR (OPTIONAL)\n\n"},{"_id":"4053431a1f286efa9400016f","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"405342961f286efa9400016e","content":"The up sensor of side door on spindle cover is not been activated during tool change process and the possible reason could be:\n-\tCover stuck\n-\tSensor need be re-adjust or Faulty sensor\n-\tLoose wire or connection"},{"_id":"405343471f286efa94000170","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":63,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2180 (2080) (A8.0) SAFETY DOOR OPEN\n\n"},{"_id":"405343d31f286efa94000171","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"405343471f286efa94000170","content":"The safety fence door been open and close the door for the AUTO operation. Or the signal circuit is failed or faulty switch. "},{"_id":"405343ff1f286efa94000172","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":64,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2181 (2081) (A8.1) NO.2 SAFETY DOOR OPEN\n"},{"_id":"4053448f1f286efa94000173","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"405343ff1f286efa94000172","content":"The no.2 safety fence door been open and close the door for the AUTO operation. Or the signal circuit is failed or faulty switch. "},{"_id":"405344d81f286efa94000174","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":65,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2182 (2082) (A8.2) CONVEYER TABLE DOWN ERROR\n\n"},{"_id":"4053455d1f286efa94000175","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"405344d81f286efa94000174","content":"The limit switch of conveyer down is not works accordingly during process and the possible reason could be:\n-\tConveyer motor is not works accordingly or stuck\n-\tLimit switch need be re-adjust or Faulty limit switch\n-\tLoose wire or connection"},{"_id":"405345e01f286efa94000176","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":66,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2183 (2083) (A8.3) SAW UP SENSOR ALARM (OPTIONAL)\n\n"},{"_id":"405346161f286efa94000177","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"405345e01f286efa94000176","content":"Saw is not retreat to up position and the possible reason could be:\n-\tNo lubrication on oiler\n-\tMechanical stuck\n-\tSensor need be re-adjust or Faulty sensor\n-\tLoose wire or connection"},{"_id":"405346411f286efa94000178","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":67,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2184 (2084) (A8.4) NO.1 X-END. SENSOR AL. (OPTIONAL)\n"},{"_id":"405346b81f286efa94000179","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"405346411f286efa94000178","content":"No.1 horizontal drill in X direction return sensor is not be activated by the possible reason:\n-\tCylinder stuck or block by chip/dust,,etc\n-\tSensor need be re-adjust or Faulty sensor\n-\tLoose wire or connection\n"},{"_id":"405346e41f286efa9400017a","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":68,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2185 (2085) (A8.5) NO.2 X-END. SENSOR AL. (OPTIONAL)\n"},{"_id":"405347851f286efa9400017b","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"405346e41f286efa9400017a","content":"No.2 horizontal drill in X direction return sensor is not be activated by the possible reason:\n-\tCylinder stuck or block by chip/dust,,etc\n-\tSensor need be re-adjust or Faulty sensor\n-\tLoose wire or connection\n"},{"_id":"405347b41f286efa9400017c","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":69,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2186 (2086) (A8.6) NO.3 X-END. SENSOR AL. (OPTIONAL)\n\n"},{"_id":"405348401f286efa9400017d","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"405347b41f286efa9400017c","content":"No.3 horizontal drill in X direction return sensor is not be activated by the possible reason:\n-\tCylinder stuck or block by chip/dust,,etc\n-\tSensor need be re-adjust or Faulty sensor\n-\tLoose wire or connection"},{"_id":"405348781f286efa9400017e","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":70,"parentId":"4052ab241f286efa940000f4","content":"2187 (2087) (A8.7) NO.1 Y-END. SENSOR AL. (OPTIONAL)\n"},{"_id":"405349031f286efa9400017f","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"405348781f286efa9400017e","content":"No.1 horizontal drill in Y direction return sensor is not be activated by the possible reason:\n-\tCylinder stuck or block by chip/dust,,etc\n-\tSensor need be re-adjust or Faulty sensor\n-\tLoose wire or connection"},{"_id":"3cb58aa1959f5e7989000020","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1.25,"parentId":null,"content":"#**OTT Edgebanding Machine Procedures**"},{"_id":"3cb75179a21fc9f7e2000024","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cb58aa1959f5e7989000020","content":"##**Operating Procedure**"},{"_id":"3cb7547aa21fc9f7e2000026","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cb75179a21fc9f7e2000024","content":"###**Pre Start-Up Checklist**"},{"_id":"3d058a4d62909dc558000068","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cb7547aa21fc9f7e2000026","content":"* Check **Compressor Unit** is in Standard Working Order\n* Check **Extractor System** is in Standard Working Order\n* Check **Auto Return Unit** switch is ON\n* Check **Cleaning Agent** & **Lubricating Agent** Containers are filled enough for the day ahead"},{"_id":"3cb75576a21fc9f7e2000027","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":2,"parentId":"3cb75179a21fc9f7e2000024","content":"###**Turning ON the Machine**"},{"_id":"3cb8c313a21fc9f7e2000042","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cb75576a21fc9f7e2000027","content":"* Turn ON **Main Isolator Switch**\n* Turn ON **Machine Power Switch**\n* Allow **On-board Computer** to boot\n - **Panel Lodge System** will automatically run on start-up\n* Press **Dialog**\n* Press **Log In**\n - Log In with assigned User\n* Press **Edgebander Operating Menu**\n* Press **CombiMelt Menu**\n* Press **Forward ON**\n - This will start the process of heating the **Glue Roller** & **Glue Pot**. At correct temperature the **Glue Roller** will begin to operate\n* Close **CombiMelt Menu**\n* Next to Messages: Press **Accept** to clear current messages\n* Hold down **ON** button to lower **Pressure Beam** to assigned height\n - The **ON** button and the **Pressure Beam Adjust** will flash until height is adjusted\n* Allow Machine to auto adjust & prepare\n - The **Warning Light** will turn OFF when machine is ready to use"},{"_id":"3cb75677a21fc9f7e2000028","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":3,"parentId":"3cb75179a21fc9f7e2000024","content":"###**Running the Machine**"},{"_id":"3ccebad0decd759e6200004f","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cb75677a21fc9f7e2000028","content":"* Load **Edgetape**\n* Adjust **Pressure Beam Height**\n* Turn ON **RS Cleaning Unit**\n* Open **T30 Menu**\n* Press **ON** Button\n\n\n* Select a **Program** on **T30 Program Select**\n - Feeding material into the **Edgebander** will operate under this **Program** until a different **Program** has been selected\n - Changing the **Program** on the fly will only affect material that is fed into the machine after the change. Material already in the machine will continue to run on the **Program** that was selected as it was fed into the **Edgebander**\n - This means that 4 different pieces of material in the machine can be under 4 different **Programs**\n* Feed Material into the **Edgebander**\n - The **Warning Light** will illuminate once the material is in the machine. This signifies that it is not yet safe to feed material into the machine. A **Barrier Pin** is attached to the **Warning Light** and will prevent any material from being fed into the machine while it is illuminated.\n* The material will exit the **Edgebander** & the **Auto Return Unit** will bring the material back to the operator\n - Narrow pieces often rest between **Rollers** & must be looked out for\n - If material is longer than 750mm and hangs over the front of the **Auto Return Unit** it will have to be manually guided.\n"},{"_id":"3d03a7e7c5503e792c000054","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":3.5,"parentId":"3cb75179a21fc9f7e2000024","content":"###**T30 Quick Select Menu**"},{"_id":"3d03a8b0c5503e792c000055","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":310861,"position":1,"parentId":"3d03a7e7c5503e792c000054","content":"The **T30 Quick Select Menu** is an on-screen button system that allows the operator to switch between pre-set modes with the tap of the screen.\nEach pre-set has a different function that allows the operator to efficiently edge the job, while minimizing any post-machining handling, such as filing or scraping.\n\n* **1mm STRAIGHT**\n - 1mm Edge, premill, radius, flush ends\n* **1mm CORNER ROUND**\n - 1mm Edge, premill, radius, rounded ends\n - Only to be used when both adjacent sides are edged\n* **1mm FRONT CORNER ROUND**\n - 1mm Edge, premill, radius, rounded front end, flush back end\n* **1mm HINGE**\n - 1mm Edge, premill, radius, flush ends\n - Hinge Cups must face down\n* **1mm CORNER HINGE**\n - 1mm Edge, premill, top radius only, flush ends\n - Hinge Cups must face down\n* **1mm NO END SAWS**\n - 1mm Edge, premill, raidus, uncut ends\n - Used on edges with angled ends\n* **1mm NO FRONT END SAW**\n - 1mm Edge, premill, radius, uncut front edge, flush back edge\n - Used for handle-less gables and edges with one angled end\n\n\n\n* **2mm STRAIGHT**\n - 2mm Edge, premill, radius, flush ends\n* **2mm CORNER ROUND**\n - 2mm Edge, premill, radius, rounded ends\n - Only to be used when both adjacent sides are edged\n* **2mm FRONT CORNER ROUND**\n - 2mm Edge, premill, radius, rounded front end, flush back end\n* **2mm HINGE**\n - 2mm Edge, premill, radius, flush ends\n - Hinge Cups must face down\n* **2mm CORNER HINGE**\n - 2mm Edge, premill, top radius only, flush ends\n - Hinge Cups must face down\n* **2mm NO END SAWS**\n - 2mm Edge, premill, raidus, uncut ends\n - Used on edges with angled ends\n* **2mm NO FRONT END SAW**\n - 2mm Edge, premill, radius, uncut front edge, flush back edge\n - Used for handle-less gables and edges with one angled end"},{"_id":"3d03a580c5503e792c000053","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":3.75,"parentId":"3cb75179a21fc9f7e2000024","content":"###**Loading Edgetape**"},{"_id":"3d0416e1c5503e792c000056","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d03a580c5503e792c000053","content":"* Place the **Edgetape** on the **Edgetape Table**\n - Roll must be Counter-Clockwise\n* Release the **Red Automatic Edge Adjust Switch**\n* Thread the **Edgetape** through the **Guide Roller** and **Guide Fence**\n* Through the **Automatic Edge Adjust Clamp**\n* Through the **Contact Pad**\n* Under the **Secondary Height Guide**\n - Adjust guide to roughly 1mm of play\n* Through the **Primary Height Guide**\n - Adjust guide to 0.5mm of play\n* Feed **Edgetape** to the arrow opposite the **Pressure Roller**\n* Lock the **Red Automatic Edge Adjust Switch**\n"},{"_id":"3cb75717a21fc9f7e2000029","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":4,"parentId":"3cb75179a21fc9f7e2000024","content":"###**Turning OFF the Machine**"},{"_id":"3cc18e70bf455edcda000044","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cb75717a21fc9f7e2000029","content":"* Open **CombiMelt Menu**\n* Press **OFF**\n - This will turn OFF the **Glue Roller**\n* Close **Panel Lodge System**\n* Turn OFF **On-board Computer**\n - Allow to completely turn OFF before completing next step\n* Turn OFF **Machine Power Switch**\n* Turn OFF **Main Isolator Switch**"},{"_id":"3cb75268a21fc9f7e2000025","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":2,"parentId":"3cb58aa1959f5e7989000020","content":"##**Maintenance Procedure**"},{"_id":"3cb757a3a21fc9f7e200002a","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cb75268a21fc9f7e2000025","content":"###**Cleaning the Glue Roller**"},{"_id":"3d05bbb462909dc55800006b","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cb757a3a21fc9f7e200002a","content":"####**To Clean the Glue Roller**"},{"_id":"3d2d412f5bf3534db90000bc","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d05bbb462909dc55800006b","content":"- **Glue Roller & Pot must be at Working Temperature**\n\n* Lower **Glue Pot Bypass** to close off the **Glue Pot**\n* Open **CombiMelt Menu**\n* Press **Empty**\n - This will release any glue that is still around the **Glue Roller**\n - Wait until the glue is only a thin trickle\n* Lower **Teflon Push Stick** into the **Glue Pot Bypass** to push out any remaining glue around the **Glue Roller**, then remove\n* Fill the **Glue Pot Bypass** with **Blue Cleaning Pellets** while the **Empty** setting is still ON\n - Wait until **Blue Cleaning Gel** is running out the bottom of the **Glue Roller**\n* Press **Clean Out** & press **Empty after Cleaning** tick box\n* Fill the **Glue Pot Bypass** with **Blue Cleaning Pellets**\n* The cleaning process will take 90 minutes & the emptying process will take another 30 minutes\n* Lower **Teflon Push Stick** after emptying process is done to remove any remaining gel, then remove\n* Place **Bypass Cap** on"},{"_id":"3d2d42e95bf3534db90000bf","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":2,"parentId":"3cb757a3a21fc9f7e200002a","content":"####**To Replace the Glue**"},{"_id":"3d2d42f95bf3534db90000c0","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d2d42e95bf3534db90000bf","content":"* Open **CombiMelt Menu**\n* Press **Forward ON**\n - Wait until correct temperature is achieved and **Glue Roller** beings operation\n* Raise **Glue Pot Bypass** by 40mm\n* Wait until **Glue Roller** starts rolling with new glue"},{"_id":"3cb75846a21fc9f7e200002b","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":2,"parentId":"3cb75268a21fc9f7e2000025","content":"###**Pneumatic Systems**"},{"_id":"3d2d3d005bf3534db90000b8","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":2,"parentId":"3cb75846a21fc9f7e200002b","content":"####**Manually Operating Pneumatic Components**"},{"_id":"3d2d3d7d5bf3534db90000b9","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d2d3d005bf3534db90000b8","content":"* Open **Factory Configuration**\n* Open **Pneumatic Controls**\n* Press **Enable Control**\n* Select a Pneumatic Component:\n - **PU Set Reinigungsmittel**: Pink Cleaning Agent\n - **PU Set Tennmittel**: Clear Premilling Agent\n - **Spruehen 1**: Green Lubricating Agent\n* Press **Enable Output**\n* Press **Green Button** ON\n - Selected Component will continue to operate until **Green Button** is turned OFF"},{"_id":"3d2d3e8c5bf3534db90000ba","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":3,"parentId":"3cb75846a21fc9f7e200002b","content":"####**Adjusting Spray Amount**"},{"_id":"3d2d3f055bf3534db90000bb","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":310855,"position":1,"parentId":"3d2d3e8c5bf3534db90000ba","content":"* Open **Safety Hoods**\n* Locate the **Brass Adjusting Knobs** for the Component you wish to adjust\n - **Cleaning Agent**: Before **Buffing Wheels** at the end of the Machine\n - **Pre-milling Agent**: Before **Premilling Unit** at the front of the machine\n - **Lubricating Agent**: After **Pressure Rollers** at the front end of the Machine\n* Turning the Knob clockwise will allow less spray, turning counter clockwise will allow more spray.\n - Recommended procedure: Adjust Knob clockwise till tight, then adjust back counter-clockwise an 8th of a turn & test spray manually. Keep turning an 8th of a turn counter-clockwise until spraying at the desired amount."},{"_id":"3cb75999a21fc9f7e200002c","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":3,"parentId":"3cb75268a21fc9f7e2000025","content":"###**Cleaning the Machine**"},{"_id":"3d0598cf62909dc55800006a","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cb75999a21fc9f7e200002c","content":"* Check **Extractor System** is in Standard Working Order\n* Press **Emergency Stop Button**\n\n\n* When cleaning under the *Hood*:\n - Open all **Extractor Vents**\n - Sweep or blow down components with compressed air\n - Sweep or blow all shavings, swarf & edge chips into the **Extractor Vents**\n* Blow down the entire Machine with compressed Air\n - Never blow dust towards the **Glue Roller**\n - Particular areas of the Machine:\n - **Pressure Beam** & **Hoods**\n - **Roller Tracks**\n - **Edgebander Feed Belt**\n - **Auto Return Unit Motors**\n - **Feed Entrance & Exit**\n - **Feed Motor**\n - **Edgetape Magazine**\n* Empty **Scraper Deposits**\n - **Extractor System** must be OFF in order to do this"},{"_id":"3cb8758ca21fc9f7e200002d","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":3,"parentId":"3cb58aa1959f5e7989000020","content":"##**Troubleshooting**"},{"_id":"3e3651de8c7568a6ea0000cc","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":2942112,"position":1.3125,"parentId":null,"content":"#**Database Procedures**"},{"_id":"3e3659058c7568a6ea0000cd","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3e3651de8c7568a6ea0000cc","content":"##**Calendar**##"},{"_id":"3e365b018c7568a6ea0000ce","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3e3659058c7568a6ea0000cd","content":"The calendar page is where you find the jobs in each day of the week for delivery, 2pac pick up dates and general memos.\n\nThe pencil buttons next to the date of each day allows you to write a memo. \n\nThere are a couple of categories to choose from but the main category you want to choose is \"2 Pac Pickup Date\". This lets you set a date for the 2 packer to pick up the material to be painted.\n"},{"_id":"3e376f268c7568a6ea0000cf","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":194288,"position":2,"parentId":"3e3651de8c7568a6ea0000cc","content":"##**Job Listings**##"},{"_id":"3f20f1dbb2ebeb50b70000e0","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":0.5,"parentId":"3e376f268c7568a6ea0000cf","content":"###**Symbols**"},{"_id":"3f20f347b2ebeb50b70000e1","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3f20f1dbb2ebeb50b70000e0","content":"There are different types of symbols that show up with each job to show a certain type of material.\n\nOutsourced: The Outsourced symbol is for vinyl doors and panels. These doors\\panels have to be ordered with a 10 day lead time.\n\nPaint Brush: The paint brush symbol is for painted doors and panels. These doors\\panels have to have a date set for pick up from the painter with a lead time of 15 days.\n\n "},{"_id":"3eec6f0869355a801e00028c","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215343,"position":1.375,"parentId":null,"content":"#**Production System**"},{"_id":"44f3d4931baa9cc54e0001c9","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215344,"position":2,"parentId":"3eec6f0869355a801e00028c","content":"#**Environment**"},{"_id":"44f3d6431baa9cc54e0001ca","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215345,"position":1,"parentId":"44f3d4931baa9cc54e0001c9","content":"**Menu**"},{"_id":"44f3d6c21baa9cc54e0001cc","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215349,"position":1,"parentId":"44f3d6431baa9cc54e0001ca","content":"**Provisional EDD**"},{"_id":"44f3d9351baa9cc54e0001cd","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215355,"position":1,"parentId":"44f3d6c21baa9cc54e0001cc","content":"This screen represents all pending orders from customers awaiting production staff verification."},{"_id":"44f3e0cf1baa9cc54e0001ce","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215357,"position":2,"parentId":"44f3d6c21baa9cc54e0001cc","content":"Orders at this stage are checked for the following:"},{"_id":"44f3e2061baa9cc54e0001cf","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215395,"position":1,"parentId":"44f3e0cf1baa9cc54e0001ce","content":"**Job Information**\n* Christian Name\n* Surname\n* Notes\n* Customer Refferal Point"},{"_id":"44f3f5c41baa9cc54e0001d1","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215560,"position":2,"parentId":"44f3e0cf1baa9cc54e0001ce","content":"**Contacts **"},{"_id":"44f4db861baa9cc54e0001db","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215550,"position":1,"parentId":"44f3f5c41baa9cc54e0001d1","content":" **Customer (Minimum Requirement)**\n"},{"_id":"44f4dc981baa9cc54e0001dc","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215549,"position":1,"parentId":"44f4db861baa9cc54e0001db","content":"* Name (Minimum Requirement)\n* Address (Minimum Requirement)\n* Phone (Minimum Requirement)\n* Fax\n* Mobile\n* Email"},{"_id":"44f4df531baa9cc54e0001dd","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215552,"position":2,"parentId":"44f3f5c41baa9cc54e0001d1","content":"**Deliver to**"},{"_id":"44f4df991baa9cc54e0001de","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215553,"position":3,"parentId":"44f3f5c41baa9cc54e0001d1","content":"**Installer**"},{"_id":"44f4dfce1baa9cc54e0001df","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215554,"position":4,"parentId":"44f3f5c41baa9cc54e0001d1","content":"**Contractor**"},{"_id":"44f4e0031baa9cc54e0001e0","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215555,"position":5,"parentId":"44f3f5c41baa9cc54e0001d1","content":"**Agent**"},{"_id":"44f4e0281baa9cc54e0001e1","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215556,"position":6,"parentId":"44f3f5c41baa9cc54e0001d1","content":"**Plumber**"},{"_id":"44f4e05d1baa9cc54e0001e2","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215557,"position":7,"parentId":"44f3f5c41baa9cc54e0001d1","content":"**Electrician**"},{"_id":"44f4e0991baa9cc54e0001e3","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215558,"position":8,"parentId":"44f3f5c41baa9cc54e0001d1","content":"**Logistics**"},{"_id":"44f4e0cb1baa9cc54e0001e4","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215559,"position":9,"parentId":"44f3f5c41baa9cc54e0001d1","content":"**Other**"},{"_id":"44f3f6971baa9cc54e0001d2","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215385,"position":3,"parentId":"44f3e0cf1baa9cc54e0001ce","content":"**Rooms**\n* Room Description\n* Design Description\n* Uploaded Drawing\n* Default Hardware Brands\n * Drawers:\n * Inner Drawers:\n * Hinge Systems:\n* Room Dimensions\n * All relevant dimensions must be completed\n* Instructions\n * Used to convey room specific instructions\n * I.E. Paint colour"},{"_id":"44f405701baa9cc54e0001d3","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":224391,"position":4,"parentId":"44f3e0cf1baa9cc54e0001ce","content":"**Styles**\n* ( * ) Indicates Default Styled Item\n * Default style only becomes relevant if two or more different colours or finishes are selected for the same styled-item.\n* Styled-items:\n * Door\n * Drawer Fronts\n * Panels\n * Open Cabinet Material\n * Kick - Melamine\n * Kicks - Laminated\n * Roller Shutter\n * Roller Shutter Frame\n * Bulkheads\n * Glass Insert\n * Glass Shelving\n * Capping\n * Paint\n * Edge\n * Pallet Skid"},{"_id":"44f42cdf1baa9cc54e0001d4","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215485,"position":5,"parentId":"44f3e0cf1baa9cc54e0001ce","content":"**Cabinets/Panels**\nThis tab is used to list all cabinets and panels within the room.\n* Cabinet ID\n * Cabinet ID must specifically match all supplied drawings\n* Product\n* Dimensions\n * Height x Width x Depth\n * Dimensions relate to carcase size only, not including door.\n* Quantity\n* Actions\n * Add Comments\n * Duplicate\n * Specify Second ID\n * Production Level ID only\n * Show Materials\n * Production Level ID only\n * Show Pricing\n * Admin Level ID only\n * Upload Drawing\n * Edit\n * Delete\n\n**Add Cabinet/Panel**\n\n**USBC**\n* Un-stocked Board Charge Calculations\n\n**Sub Total**\n**GST**\n**Total**"},{"_id":"44f490121baa9cc54e0001d5","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215480,"position":1,"parentId":"44f42cdf1baa9cc54e0001d4","content":"**Product Dialogue**\n"},{"_id":"44f4996b1baa9cc54e0001d6","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215499,"position":2,"parentId":"44f42cdf1baa9cc54e0001d4","content":"**USBC**\n\nUnstocked Board Charge is applied to all board materials not recognised as stocked and/or frequently used. All off-cuts are calculated and included in the room sub total.\n\nIf -- at the time of production -- the setout team are able to salvage the sum of the USBC; they will remove any possible calculations from the room sub totals."},{"_id":"3eecf98869355a801e000290","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215503,"position":4,"parentId":"3eec6f0869355a801e00028c","content":"#**Provisional EDD Orders**"},{"_id":"44f4b2161baa9cc54e0001d7","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215517,"position":0.0625,"parentId":"3eecf98869355a801e000290","content":"**Job Name**"},{"_id":"44f4bea71baa9cc54e0001d8","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215572,"position":1,"parentId":"44f4b2161baa9cc54e0001d7","content":"Job names should appropriately relate to the name of the customer.\nInappropriate names include: Business of Origin or Street Addresses"},{"_id":"44f4c8bc1baa9cc54e0001d9","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215524,"position":0.09375,"parentId":"3eecf98869355a801e000290","content":"**Contact**"},{"_id":"44f4c8f41baa9cc54e0001da","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215540,"position":1,"parentId":"44f4c8bc1baa9cc54e0001d9","content":"**Customer (Minimum Requirement)**\n * Name (Minimum Requirement)\n * Address (Minimum Requirement)\n * Phone (Minimum Requirement)\n * Fax\n * Mobile\n * Email"},{"_id":"44f4e26f1baa9cc54e0001e5","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":224446,"position":2,"parentId":"44f4c8bc1baa9cc54e0001d9","content":"**Delivery Address**\n * Only required when customer and delivery address are not the same. (E.g. Investment Property)"},{"_id":"450ec1ac6ab6427ebf000207","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":224447,"position":2.5,"parentId":"44f4c8bc1baa9cc54e0001d9","content":"**Delivery Contact**\n\n* Only required if different to the delivery address contact. E.g. Installer"},{"_id":"44f4e7f71baa9cc54e0001e6","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215568,"position":3,"parentId":"44f4c8bc1baa9cc54e0001d9","content":"**Show Map**\n * Click link and confirm"},{"_id":"450ecf9f6ab6427ebf000208","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":224450,"position":0.1015625,"parentId":"3eecf98869355a801e000290","content":"**Journals**"},{"_id":"450ed0356ab6427ebf000209","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":224453,"position":1,"parentId":"450ecf9f6ab6427ebf000208","content":"* Check for order instructions or changes"},{"_id":"44f4ed521baa9cc54e0001e7","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215569,"position":0.109375,"parentId":"3eecf98869355a801e000290","content":"**Room**"},{"_id":"44f4ed8e1baa9cc54e0001e8","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215570,"position":1,"parentId":"44f4ed521baa9cc54e0001e7","content":"**Name**"},{"_id":"44f4ee461baa9cc54e0001e9","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215575,"position":1,"parentId":"44f4ed8e1baa9cc54e0001e8","content":"Room names should appropriately relate to the order.\nAppropriate names include: Kitchen, Laundry, Bathroom, Butlers Pantry, etc..\nBut should never be left called \"copy of etc..\""},{"_id":"44f4f6061baa9cc54e0001ea","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215578,"position":2,"parentId":"44f4ed521baa9cc54e0001e7","content":"**Default Hardware Brands**"},{"_id":"44f4f6c21baa9cc54e0001eb","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215591,"position":1,"parentId":"44f4f6061baa9cc54e0001ea","content":"* Drawers\n* Inner Drawers\n* Hinge Systems"},{"_id":"44f507d11baa9cc54e0001ec","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":215592,"position":3,"parentId":"44f4ed521baa9cc54e0001e7","content":"**Room Dimensions**"},{"_id":"44f508551baa9cc54e0001ed","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":310574,"position":1,"parentId":"44f507d11baa9cc54e0001ec","content":"![](http://content.screencast.com/users/Cabinets_Online/folders/Jing/media/8416a49b-74f5-4866-be4b-bfcf00682c7a/Room%20Dimensions.png)\n\n* Overall Height (Mandatory Field)\n * Height of kitchen from floor to ceiling\n* Ceiling clearance / bulkhead height (Mandatory Field)\n* Fridge height and clearance\n * Height from fridge cabinet to floor\n* Splash height\n* Rangehood clearance\n * Height of rangehood from top of benchtop\n* Bench height (Mandatory Field when order includes benchtop calculations)\n * Height from top of benchtop to floor \n* Bench thickness (Mandatory Field when order includes benchtop calculations)\n* Kick height (Mandatory Field when kicks required)\n* Wall cabinet depth\n * Measurement is exclusive of door\n* Base cabinet depth\n * Measurement is exclusive of door, including 16mm construction void when required\n* Pantry cabinet depth\n * Measurement is exclusive of door, including 16mm construction void when required"},{"_id":"450e55066ab6427ebf0001fc","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":224385,"position":3.5,"parentId":"44f4ed521baa9cc54e0001e7","content":"**Selective Pricing**\nUser level access"},{"_id":"450e556c6ab6427ebf0001fd","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":224387,"position":1,"parentId":"450e55066ab6427ebf0001fc","content":"* Cabinets\n* Assembly\n* Hardware\n* DDP (Doors, Drawers, Panels)\n* Legs\n* Packaging"},{"_id":"450e59646ab6427ebf0001fe","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":224389,"position":1,"parentId":"450e556c6ab6427ebf0001fd","content":"Predominantly used for flat pack pricing\nAllows for specific customers to use ladder frame kicks"},{"_id":"450e548c6ab6427ebf0001fb","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":224382,"position":4,"parentId":"44f4ed521baa9cc54e0001e7","content":"**Instructions**"},{"_id":"450e5c576ab6427ebf0001ff","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":224390,"position":1,"parentId":"450e548c6ab6427ebf0001fb","content":"Use this field to describe room level details E.g. Overall paint colour, Horizontal grain, etc."},{"_id":"450e3cfe6ab6427ebf0001f8","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":224380,"position":0.1171875,"parentId":"3eecf98869355a801e000290","content":"**Styles**"},{"_id":"450e3e0e6ab6427ebf0001fa","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":224392,"position":1,"parentId":"450e3cfe6ab6427ebf0001f8","content":"**Styles**\n* ( * ) Indicates Default Styled Item\n * Default style only becomes relevant if two or more different colours or finishes are selected for the same styled-item.\n* Styled-items:\n * Door\n * Drawer Fronts\n * Panels\n * Open Cabinet Material\n * Kick - Melamine\n * Kicks - Laminated\n * Roller Shutter\n * Roller Shutter Frame\n * Bulkheads\n * Glass Insert\n * Glass Shelving\n * Capping\n * Paint\n * Edge\n * Pallet Skid"},{"_id":"450e6fa96ab6427ebf000206","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":229348,"position":1,"parentId":"450e3e0e6ab6427ebf0001fa","content":"* Confirm styled-item thickness matches drawing\n* Confirm all edge selections are correct\n* Confirm kick selection\n * Check length specifically\n* Confirm multiple colour selections to cabinet list"},{"_id":"450e3d4f6ab6427ebf0001f9","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":224397,"position":0.12109375,"parentId":"3eecf98869355a801e000290","content":"**Cabinets/Panels**"},{"_id":"450f0da0459ed624a100020a","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":224531,"position":2,"parentId":"450e3d4f6ab6427ebf0001f9","content":"* Confirm cabinet numbers match the drawing\n* Confirm all products height, width and depth match the drawing\n* Confirm all products match the drawing\n * E.g. Order item lists 3 drawer base. Drawing shows 2 drawers\n* Confirm if required, multiple styled items\n* Confirm specific kit sizing for products match drawing\n * E.g. drawer front heights"},{"_id":"450e6cd76ab6427ebf000201","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":224399,"position":0.123046875,"parentId":"3eecf98869355a801e000290","content":"**Benchtops**"},{"_id":"450e6da26ab6427ebf000203","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":224401,"position":0.12353515625,"parentId":"3eecf98869355a801e000290","content":"**Accessories**"},{"_id":"450e6d476ab6427ebf000202","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":224400,"position":0.1240234375,"parentId":"3eecf98869355a801e000290","content":"**Appliances**"},{"_id":"450e6def6ab6427ebf000204","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":224402,"position":0.12451171875,"parentId":"3eecf98869355a801e000290","content":"**Delivery**"},{"_id":"450e6e206ab6427ebf000205","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":224403,"position":0.124755859375,"parentId":"3eecf98869355a801e000290","content":"**Installation**"},{"_id":"41b54e62e20dd7fd44000180","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":0.125,"parentId":"3eecf98869355a801e000290","content":"Download Drawing File\n"},{"_id":"3ef95234a95aff1c000000de","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":0.15625,"parentId":"3eecf98869355a801e000290","content":"Check that Heights, Widths and Depths match between database and drawing."},{"_id":"3eec734169355a801e00028d","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":0.1875,"parentId":"3eecf98869355a801e000290","content":"Check for extra rooms in drawing."},{"_id":"3ef953faa95aff1c000000df","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":0.25,"parentId":"3eecf98869355a801e000290","content":"Ignore notes entered into electronic room drawings."},{"_id":"3eec76cc69355a801e00028e","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3eecf98869355a801e000290","content":"Check for appliance specs."},{"_id":"451c56ff5beba3a49400020b","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":319177,"position":4.5,"parentId":"3eec6f0869355a801e00028c","content":"#**Preproduction**"},{"_id":"451c57c75beba3a49400020c","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":229354,"position":1,"parentId":"451c56ff5beba3a49400020b","content":"**Drawing**"},{"_id":"451c58fe5beba3a49400020d","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":229359,"position":1,"parentId":"451c57c75beba3a49400020c","content":"**Door and Drawer reveals**\n* Confirm all cabinets reveals"},{"_id":"451c5aa55beba3a49400020e","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":229358,"position":1,"parentId":"451c58fe5beba3a49400020d","content":""},{"_id":"3eecfa1869355a801e000291","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1135677,"position":5,"parentId":"3eec6f0869355a801e00028c","content":"#**Saving order.**\n"},{"_id":"3eec778b69355a801e00028f","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3eecfa1869355a801e000291","content":"When saving to Production folder (Jobs) remember to save with order number and in cabinet vision to change titles in job properties."},{"_id":"3ca9d56afdc13d141800000c","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1936167,"position":1.5,"parentId":null,"content":"#**Cabnetware Procedures**"},{"_id":"3ca9e4ce2fd8bd001a00000c","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3ca9d56afdc13d141800000c","content":"##**Initial Job Setup**"},{"_id":"3ca9e7302fd8bd001a00000d","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3ca9e4ce2fd8bd001a00000c","content":"###**Room Defaults**\n\nOpening a new Kitchen in Cabinet Ware will bring you to the Room Defaults window on the parameters tab.\n\nHere you will see a number of parameters in which you can change to suit the kitchen you are processing.\n\nThe following is an overview of each parameter =>\n\n"},{"_id":"3d04b9e744d97e0dac000059","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3ca9e7302fd8bd001a00000d","content":"**Counter Top**\n\nThis refers to the size of the bench top (20mm, 34mm, 40mm etc) ,which will determine the height of the cabinets below, in conjunction with the kicks"},{"_id":"3d04be9f44d97e0dac00005a","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":2,"parentId":"3ca9e7302fd8bd001a00000d","content":"**Base Interior**\n\nThis refers to the type and colour of the board you have selected for the interior colour of the base cabinets"},{"_id":"3d04bfd844d97e0dac00005b","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":303008,"position":2.25,"parentId":"3ca9e7302fd8bd001a00000d","content":"**Upper Interior**\n\nJust like the base Interior, this refers to the upper cabinet colour and type of the interior"},{"_id":"3d04c23644d97e0dac00005c","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":2.5,"parentId":"3ca9e7302fd8bd001a00000d","content":"**Base Exterior**\n\nThis refers to the type and colour of the board you have selected for the exterior colour of the base cabinets"},{"_id":"3d04c93844d97e0dac00005d","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":4,"parentId":"3ca9e7302fd8bd001a00000d","content":"**Upper Exterior**\n\nJust like the base exterior, this refers to the upper cabinet colour and type of the exterior"},{"_id":"3d04cab944d97e0dac00005f","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":303019,"position":6,"parentId":"3ca9e7302fd8bd001a00000d","content":"**Layout**\n\nDefines the general Overall dimensional restrictions how cabinetry works within the constraints of the walls in both Height and length.\n\nE.g \n* Wall height\n* Bulkhead Height\n* Default Filler width\n* Minimum distances cabinets pulled from\n * Windows\n * Door Ways\n * Return Cabinetry"},{"_id":"3d04ca5c44d97e0dac00005e","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":303023,"position":7,"parentId":"3ca9e7302fd8bd001a00000d","content":"**Cabinet**\n\nDefines the Overall Cabinetry dimensions.\n* Bench Top Height\n* Splash Back Height\n* Kick Height\n* All Default Cabinetry depths\n* Basic Cabinetry format\n * Doors \n * Qty & Type of shelving "},{"_id":"3d04cce244d97e0dac000060","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":303025,"position":8,"parentId":"3ca9e7302fd8bd001a00000d","content":"**Base Construction**\n\nThis refers to the starter construction type for all cabinetry that has KICKS"},{"_id":"3d04ce6044d97e0dac000061","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":9,"parentId":"3ca9e7302fd8bd001a00000d","content":"**Upper Construction**\n\nThis refers to the starter construction type of the cabinets on the wall"},{"_id":"3d04cf7f44d97e0dac000062","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":10,"parentId":"3ca9e7302fd8bd001a00000d","content":"**Base Door**\n\nThis refers to the style of door for the base cabinets"},{"_id":"3d04d2c944d97e0dac000064","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":11,"parentId":"3ca9e7302fd8bd001a00000d","content":"**Upper Door**\n\nThis refers to the style of door for the upper cabinets"},{"_id":"3d04d3cd44d97e0dac000065","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":303028,"position":12,"parentId":"3ca9e7302fd8bd001a00000d","content":"**Drawer**\n\nDefines the Default Style requirement for the room"},{"_id":"3d04d4dd44d97e0dac000066","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":303031,"position":13,"parentId":"3ca9e7302fd8bd001a00000d","content":"**Drawer Box**\n\nDefines the Default hardware brand requirements for the room"},{"_id":"3d04d5ea44d97e0dac000067","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":303032,"position":14,"parentId":"3ca9e7302fd8bd001a00000d","content":"**Pullout**\n\nDefines the Default hardware brand requirements for the room"},{"_id":"3d04d74344d97e0dac000068","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":15,"parentId":"3ca9e7302fd8bd001a00000d","content":"**Base End Panel**\n\nThis refers to end panel types such as bar panels and panels that have specific edging eg. 1H2W"},{"_id":"3d04d8a844d97e0dac000069","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":16,"parentId":"3ca9e7302fd8bd001a00000d","content":"**Upper End Panel**\n\nSee Base End Panel"},{"_id":"3cc170ccbfddf0d494000042","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":3,"parentId":"3ca9e4ce2fd8bd001a00000c","content":"Now we can look towards a shortcut which will cut out changing every parameter in the Room Default.\n\n**Load Default**\n\nThe Load Default button, which is located on the right hand side of the tab, will take you to a template page with different settings we can select to suit our kitchen.\n\nThese templates will have different options to choose from:"},{"_id":"3d10f0dea43faea98c000070","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cc170ccbfddf0d494000042","content":"**1mm\\2mm** - Size of the edge type"},{"_id":"3d10f1bda43faea98c000071","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":2,"parentId":"3cc170ccbfddf0d494000042","content":"**Thermo** - Changes colour board doors\\drawers to vinyl adjusting the sizes accordingly"},{"_id":"3d10f339a43faea98c000072","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":3,"parentId":"3cc170ccbfddf0d494000042","content":"** Drawer type** - This sets up your drawers for the kitchen eg. Metabox"},{"_id":"3d10f3e6a43faea98c000073","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":4,"parentId":"3cc170ccbfddf0d494000042","content":"**Tops** - Here you can change the size of the tops for the kitchen\nExample Template: **1mm + Thermo + Metabox + 20mm Top**"},{"_id":"3cc1e99bbfddf0d494000046","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":4,"parentId":"3ca9e4ce2fd8bd001a00000c","content":"Lastly you can choose the **Cabinet Starting #**. This will allow you to start the kitchen from any number, handy for when you have multiple rooms."},{"_id":"3f9910da91386502490000e9","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1655384,"position":1.5,"parentId":"3ca9d56afdc13d141800000c","content":"##**Checklist**\n"},{"_id":"4204dfcfc58641f023000190","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":0.125,"parentId":"3f9910da91386502490000e9","content":"** Abbreviation List**"},{"_id":"4204e0a9c58641f023000191","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":7646,"position":1,"parentId":"4204dfcfc58641f023000190","content":"* **(NS)**\nNO SCRIBE\n* **(FDS)**\nFULL DEPTH SHELVES\n* **(UBM)**\nUnder Bench Microwave"},{"_id":"443ae819dede2772f90001c5","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":7668764,"position":0.15625,"parentId":"3f9910da91386502490000e9","content":"**Helpful Notes**\n\n* When ordering board & edge tape for jobs order** 12 working days **from the delivery date (Include the delivery date & count back)\n\n* When a** removable cabinet ** is in the design for a future dishwasher or no panels either side of a dishwasher, edge the bottom of the cabinets either side.\n\n* Change cabinet height for rangehoods to door height - (In clients order under cabinets/panels)\n\n* Standard hinge boring are at** 96mm & 64mm. **\n\n* With ** glass doors ** minus 110mm for COL doors & 118mm for Polytec doors off the length & width of the door for your glass size - Door glass is at 3mm & Shelves at 6mm - Lead time - 5 working days.\n\n* To change whiteboard shelves to ** glass shelves. **\nGo into multicross - Double click on shelf - Click on materials.\nPress \"G\" for glass on the keyboard - Click ok.\n\n* Use ** THREDBO ** for painted doors & **MANCHESTER ** for vinyl in room defaults.\n\n* Kickers & Pantry doors for** builders pantry. **\nDraw a wall on the plan - Click on custom panel - Untick Wainscot to ceiling\nUntick Counter top - Type in height click ok - Type in width click ok - Place panel on the wall.\n\n** Laminate Benchtops ** - Allow 3 days before kitchen delivery date.\n\n* To print a customers plan off the system - Go into rooms\nClick on download drawing - Click on the last date - Print plan.\n\n* To send a ** SMS to a customer **- Click on Rooms - Click on order (Blue Dot)\nClick on more options - Click on send a message - Click on customers mobile number - Type in your message - Click save.\n\n** Mitred Bar Backs **- Add 6mm for 22.5 angle & 14mm for 45 angle to each end that needs to be mitred - Working off the back size of the cabinet = Short point of mitre.\n\n* When a job has more then one room under the same job number make sure you number the** Cad ID numbers ** in the data base in running order.\nThis needs to be done before you start detailing the job, failing to do so will lose the work that has being done.\n* To change the** cabinet numbers **in the drawing to running order go to room defaulfs and type in the number in the ** Cabinet Starting # Field ** change to suit each room in the job. Also change the** Cad ID number **in the data base to suit, Click on the Cad ID Tab type in the number you need and press save.\n** Wardrobes ** Use ** Upper Cabinets ** as construction file when gables go to the floor. Also tick To Floor & No Notch under ** Toe Kicks **\n\n\n\n* Control X = Cut\n* Control C = Copy\n* Control V = Paste\n\n** Copy and paste **cabinets to lock in interior bottom to stop cabinet changing. EG - Hold down the control key and press the C then the V key. \n\n* Use ** Open Shelf ** construction when using a open whiteboard carcass for example in a walk in wardrobe.\n* Always use horizontal & vertical ** Partitions ** and ** Not ** horizontal & vertical** Dividers ** when detailing. **Dividers **can be used when adding in shelving E.G. Fixed shelf, Adjustable shelf & Shallow shelf.\n* Use ** visualtrig.com ** to workout right angle sizes.\n* Use ** Pantry - 30mm Reveal ** or ** Pantry - 30mm Reveal (GO) ** as file construction then using 30mm finger pull for drawers.\n* When you have a woodgrain job you need to tick the ** Match grain ** box for drawers and anything that needs matching within one cabinet.\nLeft click then right click on the cabinet then click on Match Grain.\n* To add in inner drawers select ** Partitions & Dividers ** click on ** Pullouts ** then click on cabinet, move up or down to suit.\n* ** Inner Drawers ** Raise bottom inner drawer to have a 20mm gap at the bottom. This is to help with the drawer bowing.\n* Move shelves up or down through ** Partitions & Dividers **\n* Use ** 96mm hinge boring **when using ** Aluminum doors. **\n* To put a shelf between drawers ** Duplicate ** a shelf in multicross cover the shelf that you just duplicated and move the shelf that you first duplicated from to the position that you need.\n \n\n\n\n"},{"_id":"4a5ad70cd85336f007000263","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":2395695,"position":0.1640625,"parentId":"3f9910da91386502490000e9","content":"* Rangehood ducts to be the full depth of the cabinet.\n* Tallboy Lemans 11 allow 1265mm space between bottom & fixed shelf.\n* Add \" r \" to right hand back all cabinets with two backs.\n** Pull Boy Bins **\nSelect pull boy bin in (Drawer type) then select (drawer slide) to suit.\n** Euro Cargo Bin ** \nHas it's own runners no need to add drawer in.\n** Servo Drive **\nBuild cabinets @ 550mm deep With No Void. Bring cabinets off the wall by 10mm in drawing.\n** Tip On Drawers **\nYou must change the drawer box setting to suit Tip Ons drawers. \n\n\n\n\n"},{"_id":"438f9fe6aa374b04ab0001ae","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":644161,"position":0.1875,"parentId":"3f9910da91386502490000e9","content":"** Cabinet Adjustments **\n\n* Make sure when your modifying cabinets that you adjust everything that you need too do before going into Multi Cross failing to do so, will lose the work that you have done in Multi Cross. \nThis also applies to re numbering Cad ID numbers in the date base with more then one room attached to the job."},{"_id":"41b5f395e20dd7fd44000186","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":645151,"position":0.25,"parentId":"3f9910da91386502490000e9","content":"** Bench Top Thickness Adjustments **\n\n* Check All Bench Top effected cabinetry for Sizing corrections required.\n\n* Adjusting the **Construction File ** on these cabinets will re size cabinet to the correctly set Room Defaults.\n\n* Due to a CAD Software limitation at the Design stage this is a standard procedure.\n\nhttp://screencast.com/t/UUP64JxFuNM"},{"_id":"45fc7d8c7b87667d81000238","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1109260,"position":8,"parentId":"3f9910da91386502490000e9","content":"**Base Cabinets**"},{"_id":"42053098c58641f023000194","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":7493332,"position":0.03125,"parentId":"45fc7d8c7b87667d81000238","content":"** Base Cabinets**\n* Check for Finished End Requirements.\n * **Finished Ends** are indicated by an **F** on the **Elevation View**.\n * Double click cabinet to Open **Cabinet Modify**\n * Select **Left/Right Ends** tab as required\n * Under **End Type** drop down, select required option.\n* Check sizing of cabinet to order\n\n* Check for Scribe Requirements.\n* Change **Construction File** to required setting.\n* Check shelving.\n* Check reveals."},{"_id":"4205330fc58641f023000195","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1010844,"position":1,"parentId":"42053098c58641f023000194","content":"**Available Options**\n* 1 BASE CABINETS (HOT KEY)\n* 3 BASE CABINET (NS) (HOT KEY)"},{"_id":"41b5b442e20dd7fd44000183","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":436250,"position":0.0625,"parentId":"45fc7d8c7b87667d81000238","content":"** Sink Cabinet **\n\n* Check for ** Finished Ends. **\n* Check sizing of cabinet to order.\n\n* Change **Construction file** to appropriate requirements.\n* Check for Scribe Requirements.\n\n* Check Reveals.\n* Check Shelving."},{"_id":"41b5b813e20dd7fd44000184","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"41b5b442e20dd7fd44000183","content":"** Available Options **\n\n* 4 SINK CABINET ( 4 = HOT KEY )\n* 4.1 SINK CABINET ( NO VOID ) (4.1 = HOT KEY)\n\nTurns top rail vertical to suit sink installation.\n\nhttp://screencast.com/t/yCyf3TeLVg"},{"_id":"41b5c9cce20dd7fd44000185","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":436251,"position":0.125,"parentId":"45fc7d8c7b87667d81000238","content":"** Drawer Cabinets ** \n\n* Check for ** Finished Ends. **\n\n* Change** Construction file** to appropriate requirements.\n* Check for scribe requirements.\n\n* Check For Appliance Conflicts.\n\n* Check Drawer Heights.\n\n* Check Drawer Depths.\n\n* Check Drawer Hardware Kits.\n\n* Check Reveals."},{"_id":"42052fb6c58641f023000193","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"41b5c9cce20dd7fd44000185","content":"Available Options\n* 1 BASE CABINET (HOT KEY)\n* 3 BASE CABINET (NS) (HOT KEY)"},{"_id":"4206448ac58641f023000196","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":436252,"position":0.1875,"parentId":"45fc7d8c7b87667d81000238","content":"** Base Return Cabinets **\n* Check for ** Finished Ends. **\n* Check Hinging.\n* Change **Construction file** to appropriate requirements.\n* Check for Scribe Requirements.\n* Check Blind Panel Sizing.\n* Check Shelving. \n* Check **Added** Hardware suitability and correct selection.\n"},{"_id":"42064761c58641f023000197","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4206448ac58641f023000196","content":"**Available Options**\n4 SINK CABINET ( HOT KEY )\n4.1 SINK CABINET ( NO VOID ) (HOT KEY)\nTurns top rail vertical to suit Blind Panel assembly."},{"_id":"42caea76ccaa7ea3610001a1","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":5014408,"position":0.1953125,"parentId":"45fc7d8c7b87667d81000238","content":"**3 Door Base Corner Cabinets**\n\n* Delete Cabinet Off Plan.\n* Click on - Lazy Susan Base - Bottom tool bar.\n* Enter sizes for cabinet in left & right hand fields. \n* Click into position on plan.\n* Repeat all steps below in Base Corner Cabinets."},{"_id":"5d84179c94b6bdba70000274","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":5014363,"position":1,"parentId":"42caea76ccaa7ea3610001a1","content":""},{"_id":"40c84d2aba6ac2424400017d","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":535586,"position":0.203125,"parentId":"45fc7d8c7b87667d81000238","content":"**Base Corner Cabinets**\n\n* Check For ** Finished Ends. **\n\n* Check Sizing of cabinet to order.\n\n* Change **Construction file** to appropriate requirements.\n\n* Check Hinging.\n\n* Check Reveals.\n\n* Check for Scribe Requirements.\n\n**3 Door Only** - Adjust Cut List **IF** a pair of doors are required - (Door Size & Quantity) - Half the door size & minus 1mm off each door.\n\n**3 Door Only** - Double click on end gable in **Multi Cross Section** and change the right hand gable side to **Cnr End** in part description - Always have door hinging set at **Hinge Left** in **Section Modify** under the **Details** tab. \n \n* Add 'r' to Right-hand back in cut list description - Go into cross section - Double click on right hand back - Add \"r\" in parts description -EG. - Cnr Backr \n\n* Shape Bottom to include Radius Corner - 18mm - Go into cross section - Click on bottom - Right click - **Shape** - **Modify** - Move to suit.\n\n* Adjust Shelf depth back by 60mm (70mm in Total) to clear Hinge and Daisy Catch - (As above)\n \n* Add 100mm internal Radius to Adjustable Shelf - (As above)\n\n\n* If Corner cabinet has a Void on one side and No Void on the other - use **3 base cabinet (NS)** as construction file - Change measurements to suit in **Cabinet Modify** in **Sizes** 16mm off length & width - Bring the cabinet off the wall by 16mm on the void side - Type in 16mm in the **Distance from wall field** - This will align the front of the cabinets.Check to see that the cabinet next to the direction you are moving has not grown 16mm if so minus 16mm off the cabinet then move. If the cabinet does not align you should delete the cabinet off the plan & put in a new cabinet and type in the measurements in this way.\n"},{"_id":"42045c93c58641f023000189","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"40c84d2aba6ac2424400017d","content":"** Available Options**\n*1 BASE CABINET (HOT KEY)\n* 3 BASE CABINET (NS) (HOT KEY) "},{"_id":"443d8585dede2772f90001c6","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1718634,"position":0.234375,"parentId":"45fc7d8c7b87667d81000238","content":"**Base Servery Cabinet**\n\n* As Base cabinets but use **Servery Cabinet** as construction file.\n\n* Check floor clearance & bottom reveal.\n* Check at filler panel next to cabinet is full length (Cabinet height + kick height) "},{"_id":"41b573cee20dd7fd44000181","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1605746,"position":0.25,"parentId":"45fc7d8c7b87667d81000238","content":"** Under Bench Oven Cabinet**\n\n* Check for finished ends.\n\n* Change Height to suit.\n\n* Change **Construction file** to appropriate requirements. \n\n* Check oven opening size & panel height to suit. \n\n* Check Panel reveals.\n"},{"_id":"41b57ba5e20dd7fd44000182","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"41b573cee20dd7fd44000181","content":"**Available Options**\n* 5 UBO (HOT KEY)\n* UBO + Drawer\n* UBO600 + Drawer\n\nhttp://screencast.com/t/sKcTyG6Ie"},{"_id":"41b70f18e20dd7fd44000188","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1011900,"position":0.375,"parentId":"45fc7d8c7b87667d81000238","content":"** Under Bench Mircowave Cabinet **\n\n* Cabinet will need rebuilding.\n\n* Delete original item from drawing.\n\n**Drawer Unit** \n* Add **Special Cabinet** at required sizing.\n* Check Heights & Depth.\n* Change to required drawer configuration.\n* Check for Scribe Requirements.\n* Check Reveals.\n\n**Microwave Box**\n* Add Special Cabinet at required sizing - Check Heights & Depths. \n* ( Drawer Unit + 20mm) if not integrated.\n* Change ** Construction file** to ** Open Shelf **.\n* Change to **Interior bottom.**\n* Change **Interior file** to appropriate requirements.\n* If a scribe is required this will need to be done manually in - **Cabinet Modify** under - **Sizes** - adjust depth of cabinet to suit. \n\nhttp://screencast.com/t/bhBNOM3ZCduF\n \n"},{"_id":"4adfb1f4371cdcf0d5000266","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1928107,"position":0.40625,"parentId":"45fc7d8c7b87667d81000238","content":"** Base Angle End **\n\n* Check sizing of cabinet.\n* Check left & right ends are (Applied)\n* Change construction file to ** Base Corner End (NS) **\n* Minus 16mm off the left & right widths. E.G. 560mm to 544mm.\n* Minus 16mm off the left & right depths. E.G. 118mm to 102mm.\n* Move cabinet off wall & cabinet beside by 16mm to create void.\n* Go to left & right ends in cabinet modify and change rear adjustments to -16 to cover void.\n* Door reveals to be 16.45mm left & right & 3mm to top.\n\n* Check hinging.\n* Add \"r\" to right hand back.\n"},{"_id":"42e3cc7f500e4664810001a8","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":5284258,"position":0.4375,"parentId":"45fc7d8c7b87667d81000238","content":"**Wine Rack** & **Open Shelf**\n\n* Check for Finished Ends.\n* Check all Spacings are Equal.\n* If Spacings are NOT Equal - Delete all Internal spacings. \n* Click On Section Modify to add Verticals then Horizontals to suit.\n* Change **Construction File** to ** Open Shelf **\n* Change **Interior Colour** to Suit **Exterior Colour.**\n* Check on **Open Cabinet Material** on paper work."},{"_id":"42e4aee3dc7e32090a0001aa","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":12934,"position":1,"parentId":"42e3cc7f500e4664810001a8","content":"Available Options\n\n*Hot Key (Open Shelf)"},{"_id":"45b795d53268efb0d0000226","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":814084,"position":0.5,"parentId":"45fc7d8c7b87667d81000238","content":" ** Suspended Vanities ** - No Back Scribe.\n\n* Check for ** Finished Ends. **\n* Change to ** Interior Bottom **\n\n* Change **Construction file** to (Vanities - Suspended) \n* Use W2 16mm White HMR 1mm PVC (SV) for Interior field.\n* Check Drawer Heights.\n\n* Check Drawer Depths.\n\n* Check Reveals.\n\n\n\n"},{"_id":"4c7aa8b9e3ae26f2cd000267","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":3178857,"position":2,"parentId":"45fc7d8c7b87667d81000238","content":"** Base Angle Corner Void **\n\n* Use 1 Base Cabinet as construction file and 2 x No Ends, leave if panels are 16mm.\n* If panels are not 16mm adjust overall size to suit panel widths E.G. Add 2mm to each wall size if panels are 18mm.\n* Minus 2mm off each cabinet either side of the base angle corner void cabinet. \n* Standard 16mm panels = Wall size = 255mm - 16mm Void = 237mm."},{"_id":"45fc7e0f7b87667d81000239","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":302548,"position":9,"parentId":"3f9910da91386502490000e9","content":"**Wall Cabinet**"},{"_id":"3f99d83a91386502490000ed","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1656056,"position":0.5,"parentId":"45fc7e0f7b87667d81000239","content":"**Upper cabinets**\n\n* *Interior Bottom**\nConfirm Bottoms are set to Interior Bottom. \nFailure to do so will result in missing components and construction holes.\n\nhttp://screencast.com/t/WE9rttKldns\n\n* Change to ** Upper Cabinets ** in Construction File.\n* Check for Finished Ends.\n* Check Door Hinging.\n* Check Reveals.\n* Check Shelving.\n* If doors are glass change door style to suit material E.G 16mm melamine doors = COL Doors.\n"},{"_id":"42c875b605428a5d380001a0","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1511205,"position":1,"parentId":"45fc7e0f7b87667d81000239","content":"**Slide-Out Rangehoods**\n\n* Check for Finished Ends.\n* Change to Interior Bottom.\n* Change Construction File - ** Ducted or Recirculated **\n* Check that the upper valance box is ticked in (Tops/Bots)\n* Change height of bottom valance to suit rangehood height - (Type measurement in the width field in cabinet modify under Tops/Bots tab)\n* Change the valance height first then the door height. \n* Change door height to suit front handle - (Type in the handle height + gap in the bottom field in section modify under Doors tab)\n* Check Door Hinging.\n* Check Reveals.\n* Check Shelving.\n"},{"_id":"42f09a89da7ecd99ae0001b0","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":2351189,"position":2,"parentId":"45fc7e0f7b87667d81000239","content":"**Wall Open Clipped End**\n\n* Change to Unfinished Ends.\n* Change to Interior bottom.\n* Change construction file to - ** Open Clipped End 3mm PR\nTry open shelf **\n* Check exterior & interior colours.\n* Confirm size of clipped end. (Click on ** Left Ends ** or ** Right Ends **)\n* Delete Adjustable shelves & add fixed shelves via (Add Horizontal) - Top tool bar.\n* Change Measurements in multicross to equal - Shelves @ 322mm square & Side & back @ 340mm Over all.\n"},{"_id":"42efca67da7ecd99ae0001ac","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":2639513,"position":2.5,"parentId":"45fc7e0f7b87667d81000239","content":"**Wall Corner Cabinet**\n\n* Check for finished ends.\n* Check sizing to order.\n* Check hinging.\n* Change to interior bottom.\n* Change construction file to ** Upper Corner Cabinets ** * Check reveals. \n* Add 'r' to right-hand back in cut list description - (Same as in Base Corner Cabinets)\n* Shape top & bottom to include radius corner - 18mm - (Same as in Base Corner Cabinets) \n* Add 70mm internal radius to adjustable shelf. \n** 3 Door Only **\n* Half the large door size & minus 1mm off each door & change the quantity to 2 doors. Do this first before going into multicross.\n* Use all the same steps as above but there is no need to delete the cabinet off the drawing. Add 'Cnr End' to right hand gable. \n"},{"_id":"42efd657da7ecd99ae0001ad","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":18322,"position":1,"parentId":"42efca67da7ecd99ae0001ac","content":"**Available Options**\n\n* UPPER CORNER CABINETS"},{"_id":"42115e5f98e436c6ae000197","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":621790,"position":3,"parentId":"45fc7e0f7b87667d81000239","content":"** Fridge Cabinet ** \n\n* Check For Finished Ends. \n* Check Interior Bottom.\n* Change Construction File to **Fridge Cabinet**\n* Check Shelving.\n* Check Hinging.\n* Check Reveals.\n* Please note that this construction file defaults the hinge boring at 64mm not 96mm as standard.\n* Use 96mm hinge boring when using Aluminum glass doors in this cabinet as they are bored at 96mm."},{"_id":"42e31c7d42a653b7e10001a3","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":416816,"position":4,"parentId":"45fc7e0f7b87667d81000239","content":"** Upper Microwave Cabinet **\n\n* Cabinet will need rebuilding\n\n**Microwave box**\n\n* Check heights and Depths.\n* Change construction file to ** Microwave Upper **\n* Change Interior material to colour board.\n* Confirm Bottom is set to Interior Bottom.\n* Remove top.\n* Make into open cabinet.\n* Remove shelves.\n\n* Add in horizontal Section.\n* Check height of microwave to set height of divider (MW height minus 32)\n* Go into **Multicross** and bring the microwave back down to level with the shelf and remove joints from either side that need biscuit ends.\n\n**Door Unit**\n\n* Move colour cabinet off wall (hold Ctrl+left mouse click)\n* Draw new upper cabinet into space.\n* Check Heights, widths and Depths (Cabinet must be 32mm smaller in width than colour cabinet and 20 less in depth)\n* Change construction file to **6.1 UPPER (Captive Gable)**.\n* Confirm Bottom is set to Interior Bottom.\n* Remove shelves if needed.\n* Set reveals (2 left, 2 right, 2 bottom)\n* Move colour cabinet back to fit around whiteboard cabinet.\n* Remove horizontal dimension.\n\nhttp://www.screencast.com/t/SAnK745DY\n\n"},{"_id":"42e33f5d42a653b7e10001a4","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":12626,"position":1,"parentId":"42e31c7d42a653b7e10001a3","content":"**Available Options**\n\n* M - Microwave (Upper) (Hot Key)\n* 6.1 - Upper (Captive Gables) (Hot Key)"},{"_id":"460a6b6477672d70eb00023f","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":5283753,"position":5,"parentId":"45fc7e0f7b87667d81000239","content":"\n** Wine Rack & Open Shelf **\n\n * Check for Finished Ends.\n * Change Construction File to ** Open Shelf **\n * Change to Interior bottom.\n * Change Interior Colour to Suit Exterior Colour.\n * Check on Open Cabinet Material.\n * Check all Spacings are Equal.\n * If Spacings are NOT Equal - Delete all Internal spacings.\n * Click On Section Modify to add Verticals then Horizontals to suit.\n * For wine racks do not count the top & bottom as a shelf.\n * Remove any cams from parts in open cabinets when processing the job.\n\n"},{"_id":"460a840977672d70eb000243","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":383557,"position":6,"parentId":"45fc7e0f7b87667d81000239","content":"\n** Tambor Cabinets **\n \n* Check for finished ends\n* Untick & Retick - ** No Bottom **\n* Change construction file to Tambor Cabinets\n* Section Type - ** “Open’’ **\n\n\n\n"},{"_id":"4a5c0615d85336f007000264","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":2378180,"position":7,"parentId":"45fc7e0f7b87667d81000239","content":"** Appliance Cabinet **\n\n* Check for finished ends.\n* Change construction file to ** Appliance Pantry **\n* Check top scribe in multi-cross. Go to Tops/Bots & untick & retick No Bottom.\n* Change shelving to suit.\n\n* Use 5mm for reveal to bottom of doors."},{"_id":"4addf29dd72bf8568e000265","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":2378192,"position":8,"parentId":"45fc7e0f7b87667d81000239","content":"** Wingline Doors **\n* Leave as ** Pair of doors ** under door hinging.\n* Remove the hinges from the left or right hand side of the cabinet to suit.\n* Remove hinge plate holes from gable in CNC when processing.\n* Go into multicross and click on the door.\n* Click on the hinge - Right click - Delete.\n* Check for cabinet conflicts\n\n"},{"_id":"45fc7e727b87667d8100023a","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":302553,"position":10,"parentId":"3f9910da91386502490000e9","content":"**Tall Cabinet**"},{"_id":"4204a975c58641f02300018a","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":382315,"position":0.25,"parentId":"45fc7e727b87667d8100023a","content":"** Pantry Cabinets**\n\nDashed Lines indicate Shallow depth shelves when used in combination with Horizontal dividers. \nAt all other times they are full depth.\n\n* Check For Finished Ends.\n* Check for Scribe Requirements.\n* Check Construction File Requirements - ** See Available Options **\n* Check Shelving Configuration.\n* Check for Inner Drawers - Check and adjust if needed in ** (Section Modify) ** - ** Pullouts Tab ** - Choose the runners that are required under ** (Hardware) ** tab in the ** (Pullout Slide) ** tab.\n* Check Reveals.\n* Check Hardware Suitability.\n* Check Hinging\n* Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts, Draw Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts\n\n\n\n\n\n"},{"_id":"4204b4bec58641f02300018c","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":2,"parentId":"4204a975c58641f02300018a","content":"Available Options\n* 2 PANTRY CABINET (HOT KEY)\n* PANTRY CABINET (NS)\n* 2.1 PANTRY CABINET (FDS) (HOT KEY)\n* PANTRY CABINET (FDS)(NS)"},{"_id":"43a95f706117c259bb0001c0","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":5238320,"position":0.5,"parentId":"45fc7e727b87667d8100023a","content":"\n\n\n** Return Pantry Cabinets (Kick Height)**\n\n** Front Colour Section ** \n\n* Change construction file to ** 1 Base Cabinet **\n* Delete whiteboard cabinet - Go to Cabinet Modify - Remove left & right ends, back, top & bottom.( No Ends,No Back tick No Top & Bottom )\n* Move Cabinet off the Plan ( Click on the cabinet - using the control key move left or right of the plan.\n* Remove all the shelves ( Left & right click on the cabinet - Choose Partitions/Dividers - Click on the shelves & delete them )\n* Check all sizing to suit ( Click on - Lazy Susan Special - Bottom tool bar - Untick and add information to suit in special cabinet window.(Tick cabinet on floor to include kick.)\n* Add left & right lengths & depths to suit cabinet - Place cabinet onto plan.\n\n** Whiteboard Section **\n\n* Change construction file to **Pantry (BC)(STD ADJ)(NS)**\n* Check sizes so that depth of blind side allows the blind panel to protrude by at least 80mm. Make the other with approximately 300 for a 580 deep pantry.\n* Remove Shelves - Section Modify - Details - \"0\" Adjustable Shelves.\n* Add a fixed shelf - Section Modify - Click on Horizontal Divider top tool bar - Click on cabinet - Adjust height to suit.\n* Add the adjustable shelves - Section Modify - Details - Add the Quantity to the bottom section then to the top section.\n* Add \" r \" to right hand back.\n* Add 100mm Internal Radius to shelves. (Refer to Base Corner Cabinets)\n* Reset Shape of Top & Bottom\n* Edge front of top & bottom.\n* Extended Short Gable to match other Gable\n* Move cabinet back onto plan.\n* Check door reveals.\n* Re number white board cabinet & create 2 Numbers on the data base.\n\n\n\n\n\n\n"},{"_id":"54e8f78a37afe7d471000271","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":2366122,"position":1,"parentId":"43a95f706117c259bb0001c0","content":""},{"_id":"54e950bc37afe7d471000275","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":2881593,"position":0.71875,"parentId":"45fc7e727b87667d8100023a","content":"\n** Return Pantry Cabinet (Walk - In) **\n\n** Front Colour Section **\n\n* Change construction file to 1 Base Cabinet.\n* Delete whiteboard cabinet - Go to Cabinet Modify - Remove left & right ends, back, top & bottom.( No Ends,No Back tick No Top & Bottom )\n* Move Cabinet off the Plan ( Click on the cabinet - using the control key move left or right of the plan.\n* Remove all the shelves ( Left & right click on the cabinet - Choose Partitions/Dividers - Click on the shelves & delete them )\n* Check all sizing to suit ( Click on - Lazy Susan Special - Bottom tool bar - Untick and add information to suit in special cabinet window.(Tick cabinet on floor to include kick.)\n* Add left & right lengths & depths to suit cabinet - Place cabinet onto plan.\n\n** Whiteboard Section **\n\n* Change construction file to Pantry (BC)(STD ADJ)(NS)\n* Check sizes so that depth of blind side allows the blind panel to protrude by at least 80mm. Make the other with approximately 300 for a 580 deep pantry.\n* Remove Shelves - Section Modify - Details - “0” Adjustable Shelves.\n* Add a fixed shelf - Section Modify - Click on Horizontal Divider top tool bar - Click on cabinet - Adjust height to suit.\n* Add the adjustable shelves - Section Modify - Details - Add the Quantity to the bottom section then to the top section.\n* Add 16mm top scribe (Tops/Bots) \n* Duplicate top re shape square & edge front edge.\n* Add “ r “ to right hand back.\n* Add 100mm Internal Radius to shelves including under top & bottom. (Refer to Base Corner Cabinets)\n* Move cabinet back onto plan.\n* Zero out toe kick to lower blind panel to floor,Check reveals to door & check blind panel sizes.\n* Duplicate end panel to create whiteboard return panel,resize to suit.= Overall height, Minus 16mm.Edge all round.\n* Re number white board cabinet & create 2 Numbers on the data base.\n\n"},{"_id":"43ea998653ebcae4dc0001c2","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":8101362,"position":1,"parentId":"45fc7e727b87667d8100023a","content":"**Corner Pantry**\n\n* Check for finished ends.\n* Change construction file to **#7 Corner Pantry**\n* Check shelving - See below for routered shelves.\n* Check hinging.\n* Check door height - (Door measurement works from the top of the kicker) - So if a 10mm gap is needed working off a 116mm kicker - This will be a minus -106mm.\n* 586mm depth = 16mm scribe.\n* Top scribe = 16mm.\n* Door reveals to be set at 16.45.\nCopy top to create a bottom the bottom in the drawing is only a template (Pantry on kicker only)- Added 10/8/16\n* Add bottom whiteboard kicker. (Pantry on kicker only)\n* Duplicate bottom and create an a filler to match the angle of the cabinet.\n**Routered Shelves**\n* Go into Multicross click on the shelf right click - Shape - Modify.\n* Change width of shelf to 420mm - Click on break point right click - Position.\n* Change angle line to right angles - Click on angle line right click - Add break point - Click on break point right click - Position - Type in measurement to suit 46.5mm.\n* Add 100mm radius to shelf - Same as in Base Corner Cabinet.\n\n\n\n\n"},{"_id":"43f9f56d78f5d2c7210001c3","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":302909,"position":1.5,"parentId":"45fc7e727b87667d8100023a","content":"**Pantry Doors**\n\n* Add a wall on the plan - (Top right hand tool bar)\n* Choose custom panel - (Bottom tool bar)\n* Choose - (Wainscot on the floor)\n* Untick - (Extend Wainscot to ceiling)\n* Untick - (Include counter top)\n* Enter the height of the doors - Minus the top & bottom gaps needed - Click OK.\n* Enter the width of the doors - Minus the left & right gaps needed - Click OK."},{"_id":"42e3c2ff500e4664810001a7","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":8121700,"position":2,"parentId":"45fc7e727b87667d8100023a","content":"**Wall Oven/Mircowave Units**\n\n** Choose which construction file you need **\n\n**#8.2 Comes with no coloured top - For mircowave trim kit**\n* No need to minus the 16mm off the mircowave height.\n* Change to Unfinished Ends.\n* Add shelf in by using horizontal partitions - Also remove joints from shelf.\n**#8.1 Comes with a coloured top - For mircowave trim kit**\n* No need to minus the 16mm off for mircowave height.\n* Change to Unfinished Ends.\n* Add shelf in by using horizontal partitions - Also remove joints from shelf.\n* Change to ** Walloven Framed ** in the data base. To change click on the cabinet field next to the cabinet number.\n\n**#8 Standard wall oven/mircowave follow as below**\n\n\n* Change to Unfinished Ends.\n* Change Construction File to ** Walloven/MW Section ** - #8 Hot Key.\n* Minus 17mm Off for 16mm & 19mm off for 18mm Mircowave Height -(Check height on paperwork) -Type in the size needed in Cabinet Modify - Tops/Bots - Top Scribe Field.\n\n** Walloven Framed **\n* Use ** 8.1 file construction **\n* This will give you a colored Top and Bottom\n* tick No Top under Tops/Bots to remove Top\n* Check Top Scribe to suit.\n* Minus 1mm in top scribe field under Tops/Bots to make cutting list/height of cabinet right.\n\n** Mircowave Opening **\n\nDo The same as ** Open Shelf ** but use ** No Ends ** for left & right ends.\n\n**Bottom Drawers**\n\n* Same Process as Standard Drawer Cabinet but use ** 2 Pantry Cabinet ** as the construction file. Or ** 2.1 Pantry (FDS) ** if a door cabinet is under the oven.\n\n**Top Cabinet**\n\n* Change to Unfinished Ends.\n* Change Construction File to **#6.1 Upper Captive Gable ** - #6 Hot Key.\n* Change to Interior Bottom.\n* Replace doors - Section modify - (Details) - Change to Door in (Section type Field) - Change to Pair if needed (Door Hinging Field)\n* Check Shelving.\n* Check Reveals & Minus 2mm off Bottom of Doors in (Section Modify)\n\n\n\n\n\n"},{"_id":"43ddf7c91c023a74d00001c1","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":5449689,"position":3,"parentId":"45fc7e727b87667d8100023a","content":"**Pantry Angle End**\n\n* Change construction file to **Pantry Corner End (NS)**\n* Change cabinet width size to suit 16mm voids to left & right. EG. 560mm to 544mm.\n* Change cabinet panels depth size by minus 16mm. EG. 118mm to 102mm.\n* Change end panels to cover voids - go into left & right ends - Change to applied end - Minus 16mm to rear. \n* If glass shelves are needed - Leave one 16mm whiteboard shelf in for templating. To change to glass - Double click on shelf - Click on Material - Type ** \"G\" ** on the keyboard for glass."},{"_id":"44f609cbc8af1757360001ee","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":382321,"position":4,"parentId":"45fc7e727b87667d8100023a","content":"**Tambor Cabinet**\n\n* Check for finished ends\n* Untick & Retick - ** No Bottom **\n* Change construction file to ** Tambor Cabinets **\n* Section Type - ** \"Open'' **"},{"_id":"5012a7539a4223d34800026f","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1649114,"position":5,"parentId":"45fc7e727b87667d8100023a","content":"** Tall Open Cabinets **\n\n* Check for finished ends.\n* Construction file (Open clipped end)\n* Remove cams from cabinet parts when processing the job."},{"_id":"45fc80ed7b87667d8100023e","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1502913,"position":11,"parentId":"3f9910da91386502490000e9","content":"**Panels**"},{"_id":"4390d2a6ac931ddbfb0001af","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":469564,"position":0.25,"parentId":"45fc80ed7b87667d8100023e","content":"** Kickers **\n\n* Add a wall to the plan - ( Top right hand tool bar) or use a existing wall.\n\n* Click on custom panel - (Bottom tool bar)\n\n* Untick - Extend wainscot to ceiling.\n\n* Untick - Counter top.\n\n* Add the length in the (Wainscot height field) - EG 2385mm.\n\n* Add the width in the cabinet width window - EG 116mm.\n\n* Place kicker on the wall.\n\n* Double click on kicker - Click on ** Panel type ** Change to ** Panels - Kick ** in panel type field using the drop down arrow - Click on ** Sizes ** and change the quantity to suit.\n\n\n"},{"_id":"42d5e9f5f09b848e760001a3","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":328998,"position":0.3125,"parentId":"45fc80ed7b87667d8100023e","content":"**Bar Kick Panel - (Wainscot)**\n\n* Check height against database and bench height (especially if top thickness is different to 34mm).\n* Add 1mm to the width of panel."},{"_id":"4204c775c58641f02300018f","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":328996,"position":0.375,"parentId":"45fc80ed7b87667d8100023e","content":"**Tall,Base & Wall Panels **\n\n* Change Construction File to ** Upper Cabinets **\n* Check Depth.\nNeeds to be 20mm + Adjoining cabinet depth for general panel requirements.\n"},{"_id":"4206878dc58641f023000199","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":398137,"position":2.75,"parentId":"45fc80ed7b87667d8100023e","content":"**Upper Fillers **\n\n* Change to 1 x **Finished End** & 1 x **No End.**\n\n* Change to ** Upper Filler ** in Construction File.\n\n* Check Depth for required finished size."},{"_id":"46e80e16ec687d30da000258","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":398135,"position":2.875,"parentId":"45fc80ed7b87667d8100023e","content":"** Fridge Filler **\n\n* Change to 1 x ** Finished End ** & 1 x ** No End **\n\n* Change to ** Fridge Filler ** in Construction file.\n\n* Check Depth for required finished size."},{"_id":"4205145cc58641f023000192","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":966194,"position":3,"parentId":"45fc80ed7b87667d8100023e","content":"**Base Filler **\n\n*Base filler Includes Benchtop & kicker into over all measurement in Cad drawing *\n\n* Check For Finished Ends (Check that both are \"**NO End**\")\n\n* Check for Fixing Cleat requirements - Note corner fillers do have cleats already priced in. \n\n* Change Construction File to ** Base Cabinets ** (Hot Key 1)\n\n* When used next to a base servery cabinet change the Toe Kick to (None)\n\n\n\n\n"},{"_id":"4630ce3ee03c933432000254","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":328977,"position":3.5,"parentId":"45fc80ed7b87667d8100023e","content":"** Tall Filler **\n\n\n\n* Check For Finished Ends (Check that both are \"**NO End**\")\n\n* Check for Fixing Cleat requirements.\n\n* Change Construction File to ** 2 Pantry ** (Hot Key 2)\n"},{"_id":"47294d75cb1bd0634c000259","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1935503,"position":4.25,"parentId":"45fc80ed7b87667d8100023e","content":"** Corner Fillers **\n* Check corner filler sizing.\n* Check for Finished Ends (Check that both are NO Ends )\n* Change Construction File to ** 1 Base Cabinets **(Hot Key 1)\n* Delete one filler panel out of the cutting list only one is needed.\n* Check the panel is edged all round.\n* Fixing cleats are already priced in no need to include. "},{"_id":"43fa4a9978f5d2c7210001c4","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":476702,"position":5,"parentId":"45fc80ed7b87667d8100023e","content":"**Shelving/Panels **\n\n* Repeat the first seven steps above in Kickers.\n* Double click on shelf - Change colour to suit in the Exterior field.\n* Click on Panel Type then change edging to suit in the Panel type field.\n\n\n"},{"_id":"48dc4a0f59c991568100025f","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":645038,"position":1.75,"parentId":"3ca9d56afdc13d141800000c","content":"##**Pre Production Checklist** "},{"_id":"48dc50be59c9915681000260","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1338481,"position":1,"parentId":"48dc4a0f59c991568100025f","content":"** Checklist When Detailing Jobs **\n\nMost common mistakes. = XXX\n\n* Hinge positions. XXX (pantry's, to close to adjustable shelf holes)\n* Reveals. XXX\n* Finished ends & biscuit ends.\n* Interior bottoms. XXX\n* Construction files.\n* Shelving. (Amounts, positions & type.)\n* Drawer front heights & hardware height & depths.\n* Back scribes.\n* Blind panel sizing.\n* Radius for Tops,Bottoms & Shelving to required cabinets.\n* Interior & exterior files. XXX\n* Correct quantity's.\n* Appliances (Check sizing.) Ventilation requirements. \n* Heat barriers for Cooktops.\n* Room dimensions.\n* Door to floor clearances.\n* Corner filler sizing.\n* Correct edging to parts. \n* Grain matching.\n* Numbers & sizes of cabinets to match on plan with data base.\n* Added hardware e.g. Bins,Lazy Susan etc. - (Hinge & drawer position.)\n* Glass shelving.\n* Room defaults.\n* Inner drawers (Choose Runner Hardware)\n* Check drawer hardware doesn't interfere with top rail.\n* Mulitcross - E.G. Radius on tops,bottoms & shelves, adding \"r\" to right hand corner backs.\n* Bar edge detail - (to end panels)\n\n \n\n\n\n"},{"_id":"4c286ab257d05cb673000266","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1041899,"position":1.5,"parentId":"48dc4a0f59c991568100025f","content":""},{"_id":"48dc539859c9915681000261","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":906632,"position":2,"parentId":"48dc4a0f59c991568100025f","content":""},{"_id":"3cc2131ac6b979c1e5000047","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":2,"parentId":"3ca9d56afdc13d141800000c","content":"##**Functions**"},{"_id":"4204bbb8c58641f02300018d","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":0.5,"parentId":"3cc2131ac6b979c1e5000047","content":"**Short Cuts**"},{"_id":"4204bca1c58641f02300018e","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"4204bbb8c58641f02300018d","content":"* **Multi-cross Section**\n Selected Cabinet - Hit Enter\n* **Hot Key**\n Use the Number prefix to **FAST** select items from menu list\n"},{"_id":"3cc22cbec6b979c1e5000048","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3cc2131ac6b979c1e5000047","content":"###**Top Tab**\n"},{"_id":"3e2514bcab2628cb8b0000ca","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":6764717,"position":1,"parentId":"3cc22cbec6b979c1e5000048","content":"**New Room** - Creates a new room\n\n**Open Room** - Opens a previously created room\n\n**Save Room** - Saves the current job you are working on\n\n**Print** - Prints the page you are on\n\n**Cut** - Allows you to cut out a cabinet\\panel and paste it elsewhere\n\n**Copy** - Allows you to duplicate a cabinet\\panel and paste it elsewhere\n\n**Paste** - Allows you to paste a cabinet\\panel elsewhere after cutting or copying it\n\n**Undo** - Can Undo your last change in the job. Caution: This button can also Undo more then one change watch out.\n\n**All (Target Button)** - Sets the view of job back to default (No zoom)\n\n**Zoom in** - Allows you to zoom in on job\n\n**Zoom out** - Allows yo to zoom out of job\n\n**Snapshot** - Takes a picture of each elevation and plan \n\n**Tape Measure** - Lets you measure the cabinets and panels\n\n**Previous\\Next Wall** - Change between walls in elevation view\n\n**Add Vertical** - Adds a vertical partition in cabinets\n\n**Add Horizontal** - Adds a horizontal partition in cabinets"},{"_id":"3d07fadae2f7cacc3e00006e","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":2,"parentId":"3cc2131ac6b979c1e5000047","content":"###**Right side Tab**"},{"_id":"3e25a12eab2628cb8b0000cb","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d07fadae2f7cacc3e00006e","content":"**Floor Plan** - Brings you to the plan view (Overhead view of the job)\n\n**Elevation** - Brings you to the elevation (Wall view of the job)\n\n**Render** - Brings you to a 3D view of the job\n\n**Multidraw** - Brings you to a sheet where your previously taken snapshot photos are placed, where they can be moved around and set up for printing\n\n**Cabinet** - Brings you to an overall view of one selected cabinet"},{"_id":"3d07fc96e2f7cacc3e00006f","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":3,"parentId":"3cc2131ac6b979c1e5000047","content":"###**Bottom Tab**\n"},{"_id":"3d07feaae2f7cacc3e000070","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d07fc96e2f7cacc3e00006f","content":"The bottom Tab consists of different types of cabinets you can draw into the kitchen, such as:\n\n**Standard base\\upper cabinets** that come at the kitchen bench height and your choice of width\n\n**Pantries** that come at the overall kitchen height and your choice of width\n\n**Corner Cabinets** that come at a choice of width and depth for both sides of the cabinet\n\n**Special Cabinets** are cabinets that you can change the entire aspect of the cabinet.(*Off the floor, on the floor, height, width, etc..*)\n\nYou can also draw **Panels** into the kitchen by way of the bottom tab, a **Room Default** shortcut is also located here.\n\nThere are two other buttons on this tab, **Cutlist** and **CNC Center**, which we will talk about later.\n\n"},{"_id":"3d04d0a144d97e0dac000063","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":198334,"position":3,"parentId":"3ca9d56afdc13d141800000c","content":"##**Upgrade Features** "},{"_id":"3fea6e60d6e21910c40000ee","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":198359,"position":1,"parentId":"3d04d0a144d97e0dac000063","content":"##**Dynamic Multicross**##"},{"_id":"3fea703ed6e21910c40000ef","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3fea6e60d6e21910c40000ee","content":"**Blind Pantry**\n\nUsing a dynamic multicross on this cabinet will cause it to become distorted after saving and re-entering the cabinet.\n\nSOLUTION: Only save the multicross using saved MXS."},{"_id":"44bd720d644957e0dc0001c7","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":220318,"position":4,"parentId":"3ca9d56afdc13d141800000c","content":"##**CNC Processes** "},{"_id":"44bd731c644957e0dc0001c8","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":199174,"position":1,"parentId":"44bd720d644957e0dc0001c7","content":"##**COL Glass Doors**##"},{"_id":"44bd942d644957e0dc0001c9","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":8576775,"position":1,"parentId":"44bd731c644957e0dc0001c8","content":"##**COL Glass Doors**##\n\nGlass Doors are comprised of two styles and 2 rails. They are created out of the standard doors that come with the cabinet.Click on Wall Door in CNC centre when checking parts.\n\n**Door Styles**\n\n* Increase height of door by 10mm - to be trimmed down later\n* Change width of door to 200mm. This will be cut down into 2 lengths @ 80mm each.\n* Change name of part to \"G-Style 2 @ 80\".\n\nDoor styles: 10mm oversized all round\n 200mm Wide\n 75mm finished size\nDescription: G-Style 2 @ 80\n\n**Rails**\n\n* Change height of door to 220mm\n* Changing the width of door: Door width minus 150. This measurement must be correct as this sets the width of the door. This will be cut down into 2 pieces @ 100mm each.\n* Change name of part\n\nEg. 200 x 150mm. G-Rail 2 @ 100\n\nRails: Door width minus 150\n220mm high\nDescription: G-Rail 2 @ 100\n\n**Glass**\n\nCOL door glass\\shelves - polished all round\n\nGlass Size - 110 minus off the height and width for glass size\n\n**Polytec**\n\nPolytec door glass- straight cut edges/5 cent corners.\n\nGlass Size - 118 minus off the height and width for glass size"},{"_id":"59991a1893b5082a92000272","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":3108684,"position":4.5,"parentId":"3ca9d56afdc13d141800000c","content":""},{"_id":"44ffe15b71c6761ed40001ed","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":220323,"position":5,"parentId":"3ca9d56afdc13d141800000c","content":"##**CW Manufacturing Processes**"},{"_id":"44fff1c771c6761ed40001ee","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1330926,"position":1,"parentId":"44ffe15b71c6761ed40001ed","content":"** Producing the plans **\n\n* Click on a elevation in your drawing - Click on snapshot - (Top tool bar)\n* Click OK to page number 1 - Repeat to all elevations - Click on multidraw\n* Arrange elevations on the page to suit - Print & click on (Fit) - Print & Save 2 copy's - Click close.\n* Print plan with cabinet report - For cabinet report press control D - In reports - click on cabinet report - Click OK - Print 2 copy's - Laminate 1 copy of each.\n* Save the other copy's for the factory's paperwork.\n\n\n\n** Batching Job into a file **\n\n* Cutlist (Bottom tool bar) Click on Batched - All rooms - File - OK.\n* Re open job if error window appears.\n\n** CNC **\n\n* Click on CNC center (Bottom tool bar) - File - Import cutlist - Click on cutlist - Find the job by double clicking on company & month - Double click on file - OK.\n* Check each piece by using the < > buttons (top of screen)\n* Click on the Screen To Machine Icon (top of screen)\n* Click on the Windows/File Explorer (bottom of screen)\n* Choose P: Drive - Double click on the month that the job is due for delivery.\n* Click on ( New Folder ) Copy & paste or type in job number & name in the folder.\n* Double click on the folders icon.\n* Click on new folder - Paste or type in the job number, name & colour.\n* Click on new folder - Paste or type in the job number,name & whiteboard.\n\n** Parts Screen**\n\n* Click on Filter parts - Materials - Tick on coloured board - Click OK.\n* Click on Nest - Run - Click OK.\n* Click on sheet pattens & check each sheet using the < > buttons.\n* Click on NC Code & Lables.\n\n** Add files to output data **\n\n* Click on P: Drive - Click on the 3 dots - Double click on the delivery month - double click on the job name - Click on the colour board folder - Click OK.\n* Repeat the same steps by clicking on the 3 dots for Label - IT & Label Images. When done - Click run & wait - Click close - OK - Print the colour board sheets.\n* Click on the Return button & repeat all steps above for the whiteboard by starting from (Click on filter parts) - Under \"Parts Screen\".\n* When finished click on the return button to continue to \"Rail List\"\n\n** Rail List **\n\n* Click on filter parts - Materials - Click on rails - OK.\n* Click on Nest - Run - Click OK.\n* Click on Reports - Click on Rail List - Print - Click on the Return button.\n\n** Paperwork for Factory **\n\n* Click on pre production list & find job.\n* Click on the Green Accept button - Click on the date highlighted blue.\n* Click on the Job Detail Report in COL Pre production & tick the PP Box for all of the cabinets including (Boxed for delivery)\n* Click on the Production Report tab - Print out paperwork.\n* File paperwork in project file.\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n"},{"_id":"45016ddd9f52d1d4ef0001f2","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":220326,"position":6,"parentId":"3ca9d56afdc13d141800000c","content":"##**CW Designer Processes**"},{"_id":"3c9cba4cf337e831d5000012","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":353681,"position":2,"parentId":null,"content":"#**Cabnet Vision Procedures**\n"},{"_id":"4550b40c07c63107e2000212","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":323102,"position":2,"parentId":"3c9cba4cf337e831d5000012","content":"##**Checklist**\n"},{"_id":"455d69ec5a43af8c0e000220","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":282476,"position":0.5,"parentId":"4550b40c07c63107e2000212","content":"All Jobs with digital drawings supplied from customers must have their Job Updated to the LOCAL database.\nUtilities > Update Job > Tick All > OK"},{"_id":"45c55ee4e386375de600022f","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":319368,"position":0.75,"parentId":"4550b40c07c63107e2000212","content":"**Base Cabinets**"},{"_id":"4550b42707c63107e2000213","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":319319,"position":2,"parentId":"45c55ee4e386375de600022f","content":"** Base Door Cabinet**\n* Check sizing of cabinet to order.\n* Check for Scribe Requirements.\n* Check Hinging.\n * Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts, Draw Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts.\n* Check Shelving.\n * No. of Shelf Pins, No. of Shelf Pin Columns, Shelf Pin Positioning, Adjustable Shelf Depth.\n* Check Reveals.\n * Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets."},{"_id":"4550bbda07c63107e2000215","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":309745,"position":2.5,"parentId":"45c55ee4e386375de600022f","content":"**Base Sink Cabinet **\n* Check sizing of cabinet to order.\n* Check for Scribe Requirements.\n* Check for Construction Requirements.\n * Check Vertical Rail.\n* Check Hinging.\n * Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts, Draw Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts.\n* Check Shelving.\n * No. of Shelf Pins, No. of Shelf Pin Columns, Shelf Pin Positioning, Adjustable Shelf Depth.\n * 5 Adjustable Shelf Holes for Sink Cabinets.\n* Check Reveals.\n * Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets."},{"_id":"455cae6a5a43af8c0e00021f","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":324195,"position":2.625,"parentId":"45c55ee4e386375de600022f","content":"**Base Return Cabinet**\n* Check sizing of cabinet to order.\n* Check for Scribe Requirements.\n* Check for Construction Requirements.\n * Check Vertical Rail.\n * Check Return Panel.\n* Check Hinging.\n * Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts, Draw Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts.\n* Check Shelving.\n * Add second column of Shelf Pin Holes when back is 1351mm or more on a Return Cabinet.\n* Check Reveals.\n * Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets."},{"_id":"4550c0e507c63107e2000216","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":324275,"position":2.75,"parentId":"45c55ee4e386375de600022f","content":"**Base Corner Cabinets**\n* Check sizing of cabinet to order.\n* Check for Scribe Requirements.\n* Check Hinging.\n * Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts, Draw Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts.\n* Check Shelving.\n * No. of Shelf Pins, No. of Shelf Pin Columns, Shelf Pin Positioning, Adjustable Shelf Depth\n * Add second column of Shelf Pin Holes when back is 1351mm or more on a Corner Cabinet.\n* Check Reveals.\n * Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets."},{"_id":"4550d59c07c63107e200021a","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":309737,"position":2.875,"parentId":"45c55ee4e386375de600022f","content":"**Base Drawer Cabinets ** \n* Check sizing of cabinet to order.\n* Check for scribe requirements.\n* Check Drawers.\n * Drawer Height, Drawer Depth, Hardware Kits, Drawer Clearances, Appliance Conflicts.\n* Check Reveals.\n * Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets."},{"_id":"4550ba1d07c63107e2000214","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":309751,"position":3,"parentId":"45c55ee4e386375de600022f","content":"**Base Servery Cabinet**\n* Check sizing of cabinet to order.\n* Check for Scribe Requirements.\n* Check for Construction Requirements.\n * Check Door/Floor Clearance.\n* Check Hinging.\n * Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts, Draw Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts.\n* Check Shelving.\n * No. of Shelf Pins, No. of Shelf Pin Columns, Shelf Pin Positioning, Adjustable Shelf Depth.\n* Check Reveals.\n * Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets."},{"_id":"4550f3c107c63107e200021b","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":309761,"position":4,"parentId":"45c55ee4e386375de600022f","content":"** UBO Cabinet**\n* Check sizing of cabinet to order.\n* Check for scribe requirements.\n* Check Oven Opening.\n* Check Front Face Panels."},{"_id":"4550f63107c63107e200021c","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":310059,"position":5,"parentId":"45c55ee4e386375de600022f","content":"** UBM Cabinet **\n* Check sizing of cabinet to order.\n* Check for Scribe Requirements.\n* Check Drawers.\n * Drawer Height, Drawer Depth, Hardware Kits, Drawer Clearances, Appliance Conflicts.\n* Check Microwave Opening.\n* Check Reveals.\n * Remove Reveals on Microwave Cabinet. Add 2mm Reveal to adjacent Cabinets."},{"_id":"45c56360e386375de6000231","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":282448,"position":2.875,"parentId":"4550b40c07c63107e2000212","content":"**Tall Cabinets**"},{"_id":"455215008f5797d88700021d","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":666767,"position":2,"parentId":"45c56360e386375de6000231","content":"** Pantry Cabinets**\n* Check sizing of cabinet to order.\n* Check for Scribe Requirements.\n* Check Hinging.\n * Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts, Draw Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts.\n* Check Drawers.\n * Drawer Height, Drawer Depth, Hardware Kits, Drawer Clearances, Appliance Conflicts.\n* Check Shelving.\n * No. of Shelf Pins, No. of Shelf Pin Columns, Shelf Pin Positioning, Adjustable Shelf Depth.\n* Check Reveals.\n * Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets.\n* If the inner drawer runner is not the same as the default you will need to change it in the Cabinet Properties.\n * With the cabinet in Cabinet View click on the Section tab then the Properties tab. - Click on the Hardware tab.\nUse the drop down box in the Guides Schedule to select the runner you need."},{"_id":"455215ff8f5797d88700021e","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":309996,"position":3,"parentId":"45c56360e386375de6000231","content":"** Return Pantry Cabinets **\n* Check sizing of cabinet to order.\n* Check for Scribe Requirements.\n* Check for Construction Requirements.\n * Check Return Panel.\n * Check Door/Floor Clearance.\n* Check Hinging.\n * Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts, Draw Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts.\n* Check Shelving.\n * No. of Shelf Pins, No. of Shelf Pin Columns, Shelf Pin Positioning, Adjustable Shelf Depth.\n * Add second column of Shelf Pin Holes when back is 1351mm or more on a Return Cabinet.\n* Check Reveals.\n * Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets."},{"_id":"45c55b72e386375de600022e","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":310047,"position":4,"parentId":"45c56360e386375de6000231","content":"**Angled Pantry Cabinets**\n* Check sizing of cabinet to order.\n* Check for Scribe Requirements.\n* Check Hinging.\n * Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts, Draw Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts.\n* Check Shelving.\n * No. of Shelf Pins, No. of Shelf Pin Columns, Shelf Pin Positioning, Adjustable Shelf Depth.\n* Check Reveals.\n * Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets."},{"_id":"45c56657e386375de6000234","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":310226,"position":5,"parentId":"45c56360e386375de6000231","content":"**Split Pantry Cabinets**\n* Check sizing of cabinet to order.\n* Check for Scribe Requirements.\n* Check Hinging.\n * Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts, Draw Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts.\n* Check Drawers.\n * Drawer Height, Drawer Depth, Hardware Kits, Drawer Clearances, Appliance Conflicts.\n* Check Shelving.\n * No. of Shelf Pins, No. of Shelf Pin Columns, Shelf Pin Positioning, Adjustable Shelf Depth.\n* Check Reveals.\n * Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets."},{"_id":"45c56707e386375de6000235","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":310228,"position":6,"parentId":"45c56360e386375de6000231","content":"**Broom Cabinets**\n* Check sizing of cabinet to order.\n* Check for Scribe Requirements.\n* Check Hinging.\n * Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts, Draw Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts.\n* Check Shelving.\n * No. of Shelf Pins, No. of Shelf Pin Columns, Shelf Pin Positioning, Adjustable Shelf Depth."},{"_id":"45c56a58e386375de6000236","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":282467,"position":3.9375,"parentId":"4550b40c07c63107e2000212","content":"**Wall Cabinets**"},{"_id":"45c4c301e386375de6000226","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":310132,"position":2,"parentId":"45c56a58e386375de6000236","content":"**Wall Door Cabinet**\n* Check sizing of cabinet to order.\n* Check Hinging.\n * Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts.\n* Check Shelving.\n * No. of Shelf Pins, No. of Shelf Pin Columns, Shelf Pin Positioning, Adjustable Shelf Depth.\n* Check Reveals.\n * Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets."},{"_id":"45c4c493e386375de6000228","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":310118,"position":3,"parentId":"45c56a58e386375de6000236","content":"**Wall Return Cabinet**\n* Check sizing of cabinet to order.\n* Check Construction Requirements.\n * Check Return Panel.\n* Check Hinging.\n * Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts, Draw Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts.\n* Check Shelving.\n * No. of Shelf Pins, No. of Shelf Pin Columns, Shelf Pin Positioning, Adjustable Shelf Depth.\n * Add second column of Shelf Pin Holes when back is 1351mm or more.\n* Check Reveals.\n * Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets."},{"_id":"45c4c364e386375de6000227","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":310121,"position":4,"parentId":"45c56a58e386375de6000236","content":"**Wall Corner Cabinet**\n* Check sizing of cabinet to order.\n* Check Hinging.\n * Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts.\n* Check Shelving.\n * Add second column of Shelf Pin Holes when back is 951mm or more.\n* Check Reveals.\n * Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets."},{"_id":"45c4c768e386375de600022b","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":310115,"position":4.5,"parentId":"45c56a58e386375de6000236","content":"**Fridge Cabinet**\n* Check sizing of cabinet to order.\n* Check Elevation & Fridge Space\n* Check Hinging.\n * Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts.\n* Check Reveals.\n * Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets."},{"_id":"45c4c5d3e386375de6000229","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":310148,"position":5,"parentId":"45c56a58e386375de6000236","content":"**Rangehood Cabinet**\n* Check sizing of cabinet to order.\n* Check for Construction Requirements.\n * Check Rangehood Specifications & Modify Ducting.\n* Check Hinging.\n * Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts, Draw Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts.\n* Check Shelving.\n * No. of Shelf Pins, No. of Shelf Pin Columns, Shelf Pin Positioning, Adjustable Shelf Depth.\n* Check Reveals. \n * Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets."},{"_id":"45c4c63de386375de600022a","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":666821,"position":6,"parentId":"45c56a58e386375de6000236","content":"**Wall Microwave Cabinet**\n* Check sizing of cabinet to order.\n* Check for Construction Requirements.\n * Check for Finished Ends.\n * Check Appliance Opening.\n* Check Hinging.\n * Hinge Orientation, Shelf Conflicts, Draw Conflicts & Cabinet Conflicts.\n* Check Reveals.\n * Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets."},{"_id":"4550cc4507c63107e2000217","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":645052,"position":5,"parentId":"4550b40c07c63107e2000212","content":"**Roller Shutter Cabinet**\n* Check sizing of cabinet to order.\n* Check for Construction Requirements.\n * Roller Shutter Opening & Frame.\n* Check Shelving.\n * No. of Shelf Pins, No. of Shelf Pin Columns, Shelf Pin Positioning, Adjustable Shelf Depth.\n* Check Reveals.\n * Reveals altered for Adjacent Panels & Appliance Cabinets."},{"_id":"460775c63aa3baaca800023f","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":310229,"position":5.5,"parentId":"4550b40c07c63107e2000212","content":"**Wine Rack**"},{"_id":"45f976e77b87667d81000233","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":300947,"position":6.5,"parentId":"4550b40c07c63107e2000212","content":"**Glass Shelves**\n* Open Cabinet in Section View\n * Click Section Interior\n * Select Shelf > Under Type Heading > Glass Adj Shelf\n* Open End View\n * Select Glass Adj Shelf\n * Under Attributes Heading > Drill - Pin Distance Below Shelf > Adjust Value so that Centre Shelf Pin, is positioned on the glass shelf (Approx Value: -3)"},{"_id":"4621db275e18e77674000243","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1894976,"position":2.5,"parentId":"3c9cba4cf337e831d5000012","content":"##**Help Manual**"},{"_id":"462ef372d6f1d70af2000254","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1234236,"position":1.25,"parentId":"4621db275e18e77674000243","content":"###**Reveals**\n***Changing Reveals on cabinets allow Doors/Drawers to function properly, and creates uniform gaps between Fronts.***\n* Open cabinet in **Cabinet Level**\n* Open **Section View** and open **Reveals** from the **Properties Menu Ribbon**\n* Changing the Values within the **Reveals** will change the gaps on the cabinet\n * **Top** creates a reveal on the top side of the cabinet front. **Indicated in *Yellow***\n * E.g. a Value of 3 creates a 3mm reveal on the top.\n * **Bottom** creates a reveal on the bottom side of the cabinet front. **Indicated in *Green***\n * E.g. a Value of 3 creates a 3mm reveal on the bottom.\n * **Left** creates a reveal on the left side of the cabinet front. **Indicated in *Red***\n * E.g. a Value of 1 will create a 1mm reveal on the left.\n * **Right** creates a reveal on the right side of the cabinet front. **Indicated in *Orange***\n * E.g. a Value of 1 will create a 1mm reveal on the right.\n * **Horizontal** determines the width of the horizontal gaps between drawers/doors. **Indicated in *Purple***\n * E.g. a Value of 3 will create a 3mm gap between each drawer/door.\n * **Vertical** determines the width of the vertical gaps between drawers/doors. **Indicated in *Blue***\n * E.g. a Value of 2 will create a 2mm gap between each drawer/door.\n* Click **OK** to confirm changes\n\n<img class=\"embeddedObject\" src=\"http://content.screencast.com/users/Cabinets_Online/folders/Default/media/eb2e84a0-dfd9-4325-a334-f45e355b058f/Reveals%20Diagram.png\" width=\"421\" height=\"655\" border=\"0\" /></a> "},{"_id":"462484115e18e77674000245","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1185704,"position":2,"parentId":"4621db275e18e77674000243","content":"###**Vertical Rail**\n***Vertical Rails are used in Sink Cabinets or when a Horizontal Rail obstructs Appliances.***\n* Select cabinet in **Room Level** or open in **Cabinet Level**\n* Change **Top Rail (Vertical)** Value, on the **Side Menu Bar**\n * **True**: Will create a **Vertical Rail**\n * **False**: Will crate a **Horizontal Rail** (Standard)\n\n######Vertical Rail, Sink Cabinet, Rail Direction, Rail Orientation, Sink Rail"},{"_id":"462484975e18e77674000246","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":324557,"position":3,"parentId":"4621db275e18e77674000243","content":"###**Back Scribe**\n***Back Scribe adds a void to the back of the Cabinet which is included in the overall depth measurement.***\n* Select cabinet in **Room Level** or open in **Cabinet Level**\n* Change **Back (Scribe)** Value, on the **Side Menu Bar**\n * E.g. Value: 16, will add a 16mm (Standard) void to the back.\n\n######Back Scribe, Back Void"},{"_id":"462485045e18e77674000247","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":324559,"position":4,"parentId":"4621db275e18e77674000243","content":"###**Bottom Scribe**\n***Bottom Scribe adds a void to the bottom of the Wall Cabinet which is included in the overall height measurement.***\n* Select cabinet in **Room Level** or open in **Cabinet Level**\n* Change **Bottom Scribe** Value, on the **Side Bar Menu**\n * E.g. Value: 17, will add a 17mm (Standard) void to the bottom.\n\n######Bottom Scribe, Bottom Void, Underpanel, Under Panel"},{"_id":"462485785e18e77674000248","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":324562,"position":5,"parentId":"4621db275e18e77674000243","content":"###**Finger Pull**\n***Adjust the Depth of the Wall Cabinet Bottom to allow for Finger Pull Doors.***\n* Select cabinet in **Room Level** or open in **Cabinet Level**\n* Change **Bottom (Fingerpull Adjust)** Value, on the **Side Bar Menu**\n * E.g. Value: 16, will add a 16mm (Standard) gap to the front of the Cabinet Bottom.\n\n######Finger Pull, Fingerpull"},{"_id":"462e3c04d6f1d70af2000252","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":328127,"position":5.5,"parentId":"4621db275e18e77674000243","content":"###**Solid Top Base Cabinet**\n***Change a Base Cabinet to Solid Top construction.***\n* Open cabinet in **Cabinet Level**\n* Open **Section View** and open **Case** from the **Properties Menu Ribbon**\n* Select the **Full Top** tick-box\n* Click **OK**\n\n######Full Top, Hard Top, Full Case"},{"_id":"462485e25e18e77674000249","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1984143,"position":6,"parentId":"4621db275e18e77674000243","content":"###**False Bottom**\n***False Bottoms are added to Wall Cabinets for LED Lighting or an optional addition for Finger Pull.***\n* Open cabinet in **Cabinet Level**\n* Open **Section Interior View**\n* Add a **Horizontal Split** into the bottom space\n* Select and change new **Horizontal Split** to **Fixed Shelf** on the **Side Menu Bar**\n* Position the **Fixed Shelf** directly above the bottom\n * Method 1: Select and drag the **Fixed Shelf** into contact with the **Bottom**\n * Method 2: Select the space between the **Fixed Shelf** and **Bottom**, and change the **Height** value, on the **Side Menu Bar** to 0\n* **Equalize Height** on remaining spaces\n * Right-click and select **Equalize Height** on each space\n\n***If Fixed Shelf is supplied loose:***\n* Open **Face View**\n* Select **Fixed Shelf**\n* On the **Side Menu Bar** under the **Attributes** heading, change the following values:\n * **Edge WP - Back 1**: 0\n * **Edge WP - Left**: 0\n * **Edge WP - Right**: 0\n\n######False Bottom, Second Bottom, Fixed Shelf, Finger Pull, Fingerpull, LED Lighting, Down Lights"},{"_id":"462487225e18e7767400024b","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":324582,"position":8,"parentId":"4621db275e18e77674000243","content":"###**Number Of Adjustable Holes**\n***Change how many Shelf Pin Holes each Adjustable Shelf has in a cabinet.***\n* Select cabinet in **Room Level** or open in **Cabinet Level**\n* Change **Number of Adjustable Holes** Value, on the **Menu Side Bar**\n * E.g. Value: 3, will give each Adjustable Shelf, 3 Holes (Standard).\n\n######Adjustable Shelf Holes, Shelf Pins,Shelf Pin Holes, More Shelf Holes,Add Shelf Holes"},{"_id":"462488105e18e7767400024c","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":346838,"position":9,"parentId":"4621db275e18e77674000243","content":"###**TZ20 Block**\n***Add/Remove/Change where a TZ20 is used on a cabinet.***\n* Select cabinet in **Room Level** or open in **Cabinet Level**\n* Change **TZ20 Block (Options Menu)** Value, on the **Side Menu Bar**\n * Changing the value to **True** will give you new options.\n * **TZ20 Block (Back)**\n * **TZ20 Block (Front Rail)**\n * **TZ20 Block (Left Gable)**\n * **TZ20 Block (Right Gable)**\n * **True**: Will add a **TZ20 Block** (Standard on Base Cabinet Backs)\n * **False**: Will remove a **TZ20 Block**\n\n######Benchtop Fixing, Bench Top Fixing, Benchtop Anchor"},{"_id":"462489365e18e7767400024d","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":324547,"position":10,"parentId":"4621db275e18e77674000243","content":"###**Rehinging**\n***Change the orientation of a Hinged Door left/right.***\n* Select cabinet in **Room Level**\n* Right-click the cabinet\n* Select **Rehinge**"},{"_id":"462489b05e18e7767400024e","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":327825,"position":10.25,"parentId":"4621db275e18e77674000243","content":"###**Moving a Hinge**\n**_Move a Hinge up/down on a Door_**\n* Select cabinet and open in **Cabinet Level**\n* In **Face View** or **End View**, select the hinge\n* Change **Up/Down (Y)**, Value on the **Side Menu Bar**\n* Add/Subtract from Value to move Hinge. Current Value(+/-)Value = New Position\n * E.g. 1. Current Value: 180. Type 180+100 in Value Entry, press enter. New Value: 280\n * E.g. 2. Current Value: 240. Type 240-60 in Value Entry, press enter. New Value: 180"},{"_id":"467d494ca5fa570abc000255","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1944984,"position":10.375,"parentId":"4621db275e18e77674000243","content":"###**Drawer Depth**\n***Change the depth of Drawers manually.***\n* Open cabinet in **Cabinet Level**\n* In **Section Face View** select a Drawer Front\n* Change **Box Depth** Value, from the drop-down, on the **Side Menu Bar**\n\n######Drawer Runner Depth, Drawer Hardware Depth, Change Depth of Drawer"},{"_id":"467d496da5fa570abc000256","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":358092,"position":10.4375,"parentId":"4621db275e18e77674000243","content":"###**Drawer Height**\n***Change the height of Drawers manually.***\n* Open cabinet in **Cabinet Level**\n* In **Section Face View** select a Drawer\n* Change **Height** Value, under the **Dimensions** heading, on the **Side Menu Bar**\n * Reveals must be considered when changing value.\n * E.g. 250 drawer must be entered as 247, with 3 Horizontal/Top reveal"},{"_id":"462497935e18e77674000253","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":324174,"position":10.5,"parentId":"4621db275e18e77674000243","content":"###**Edgebanding**\n***Change the edged sides on a selected part***\n* Open cabinet or part in **Cabinet Level**\n* Open Face View/Plan View/End View (Select the view that will show a face view of the part to edit)\n* Right-click and select **Edge Banding** on part to edit\n* Add/Remove Edgebanding as necessary\n * Under **Banding** heading:\n * **None**: Acts as a remove option\n * **Interior Banding (Yellow)**: Adds Interior Coloured Banding\n * **Exterior Banding (Red)**: Adds Exterior Coloured Banding\n * **Door Banding (Blue)**: Adds Door Coloured Banding\n * Select a Banding Option\n * Click the edge to be banded"},{"_id":"462e4483d6f1d70af2000253","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1984180,"position":11.5,"parentId":"4621db275e18e77674000243","content":"###**Exposed Interior**\n***Change a cabinets construction material to Exposed Interior Colour.***\n* Open cabinet in **Cabinet Level**\n* Open **Section View** and open **Case** from the **Properties Menu Ribbon**\n* Select the **Exposed Interior** tick-box\n* Click **OK**\n\n######Colour Interior, Colour Construction, Colour Cabinet, Colour Inside"},{"_id":"46248bbd5e18e7767400024f","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":327781,"position":12,"parentId":"4621db275e18e77674000243","content":"###**Bi-fold Doors**\n**_Create Bi-fold Hinged Doors on a Cabinet_**\n* Open Cabinet in **Cabinet Edit**\n * Right-click, select **Edit**. Alternatively Double-click.\n* Split Door Vertically\n * Select Door in **Section Face View**\n * Click **Vertical Split** in **Section Menu Ribbon**\n* Change Hinge Orientation on Bi-fold Leaf Door\n * Select Bi-fold Leaf Door in **Section Face View**\n * Change **Hinge** Value on the **Side Menu Bar**\n* Change Bi-fold Door Hinge Type to **Bi-fold Door Cup Hinge**\n * Right-click Bi-fold Leaf Door, select **Properties**\n * Open **Hinges** Tab\n * Click **Change** Button, under **Hinge Type**\n * In **Select A Material** Window, open **Hinges Tab**\n * Select **Bi-fold Door Cup Hinge**\n * Click **OK**\n* Add **Wingline Runner** Drilling\n * Select Bi-Fold Leaf Door in Face View\n * Change **Drill For Wingline Runner** Value from the drop down menu, on the **Side Menu Bar**\n * **False**: Removes 780 Wingline Runner Drilling\n * **True**: Adds 780 Wingline Runner Drilling\n * **Drill For 230 Cup**\n * **True**: Changes 780 Wingline Runner Drilling to 230 Wingline Runner Drilling\n * **False**: Changes 230 Wingline Runner Drilling to 780 Wingline Runner Drilling\n * **Drill For 770 Cup**\n * **True**: Changes 780 Wingline Runner Drilling to 770 Wingline Runner Drilling\n * **False**: Changes 770 Wingline Runner Drilling to 780 Wingline Runner Drilling\n * **Top Overlay**\n * Value:16 (Standard)\n * Value:0 (No Top Cabinet)\n\n######Bifold, Folding Door"},{"_id":"4624ce9d5e18e77674000254","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":364094,"position":13,"parentId":"4621db275e18e77674000243","content":"###**Return Panel Adjustable Shelf**\n***Change an Adjustable Shelf in a Return Cabinet, to be in the return side.***\n* Open cabinet in **Cabinet Level**\n* Select the Adjustable Shelf in **Face View**\n* On the **Side Bar Menu**, under the **Attributes** heading, change the following values:\n * **AP-1 Parametric Adjustment**: **True**\n * **AP-5 Length**: Current Value -(sum width of doors)\n * 0 (Current Value) - 750 (Sum width of doors) = -750 (New Value)\n\n***If cabinet is right-hand return:***\n* Change **Left/Right (x)**, Value on the **Side Menu Bar**\n * Add **AP-5 Length** Value to Current Value\n * 17.5 (Current Value) + 750 (**AP-5 Length** Value) = 767.5 (New Value)\n\n***Correcting Shelf Pin Boring:***\n* On the **Side Bar Menu**, under the **Attributes** heading, change the following values:\n * **Back 1 - Edit Drilling**: True\n * **Back 1 - No. of Columns**: 2\n * Adds a second column of Shelf Holes\n * **Back 1 - Equalize Columns**: False\n * **Edge WP - Back 2**: 2\n * **Back 2 - Edit Drilling**: True\n * **Back 2 - No. of Columns**: 2\n * Adds a second column of Shelf Holes\n * **Back 2 - Equalize Columns**: False\n * **Back 2 - Z**: 2\n * This is to compensate for the Blind Panel Offset\n\n\n* Correct Adjustable Shelf Edgebanding"},{"_id":"462540325e18e77674000255","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":2748718,"position":14,"parentId":"4621db275e18e77674000243","content":"###**Single Void Corner Cabinets**\n***Add a void to one back of a Corner Cabinet, while having no void on the opposite back.***\n**Adding Void to True Back**\n* Select cabinet in **Room Level**\n* Change **Back (Scribe)** Value, on the **Side Menu Bar**, to: 0\n* On the **Side Bar Menu**, change the following values:\n * Under the **Dimensions** heading, **Depth**: Current Value subtract Desired Void (16mm Standard)\n * E.g. 900 (Depth) - 16 (Void) = 884 (New Depth)\n * Under **Position** heading, **Outset**: Change Value to Desired Void (16mm Standard)\n * E.g. 0 (Outset) + 16 (Void) = 16 (New Outset)\n * Under **Attributes** heading, **Depth 2**: Change Value to adjacent cabinet depth - Desired Void\n * E.g. 560 (Cabinet Depth) - 16 (Void) = 544 (Same actual dimension as 560 cabinet with 16mm scribe)\n\n**Adding Void to Second Back**\n* Select cabinet in **Room Level**\n* Change **Back (Scribe)** Value, on the **Side Menu Bar**, to: 0\n* On the **Side Bar Menu**, change the following values:\n * Under the **Dimensions** heading, **Width**: Current Value subtract Desired Void (16mm Standard)\n * E.g. 900 (Width) - 16 (Void) = 884 (New Depth)\n * Under **Clearance** heading, **Left**: Change Value to Desired Void (16mm Standard)\n * E.g. 0 (Clearance) + 16 (Void) = 16 (New Clearance)\n * Under **Attributes** heading, **Depth 1**: Change Value to adjacent cabinet depth - Desired Void\n * E.g. 560 (Cabinet Depth) - 16 (Void) = 544 (Same actual dimension as 560 cabinet with 16mm scribe)"},{"_id":"52994124ad14455da200026d","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1984285,"position":15,"parentId":"4621db275e18e77674000243","content":"###**Changing Cabinet Construction**\n* Select cabinet at** Room Level**\n* Open up **Properties**\n* Select **Construction**\n* Select cabinet construction required eg **Captive Gable**\n* Select **Joints ( Reset Intelli-Joints)** to** True**\n"},{"_id":"529950aead14455da200026e","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1984283,"position":16,"parentId":"4621db275e18e77674000243","content":"###**Moving draws in the carcase**\n* Select cabinet at **Room level**\n* Select **Section** view\n* Select **Drawer (Options Menu)** and change to **True**\n* Click on the face of the drawer that you need to adjust.\n* Click on Clearances and adjust by changing via top or bottom measurements.\n\n"},{"_id":"52995dc1ad14455da200026f","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1984163,"position":1,"parentId":"529950aead14455da200026e","content":""},{"_id":"529965bdad14455da2000270","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":2748713,"position":17,"parentId":"4621db275e18e77674000243","content":"###**Grain Matching**\n* Select **Elevation**\n* Select the cabinet you need to grain match\n* Select **Grain Match**\n* Right click on the cabinet and select create a group."},{"_id":"574875452b99a2c1b3000272","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":2748719,"position":19,"parentId":"4621db275e18e77674000243","content":"###**Adding Hinges**\n***Add hinges to Doors where extra support is needed.***\n* Open Cabinet in **Cabinet Edit**\n* Select **Section** view\n* Right-click selected **Door**\n* Select **Properties**\n* Open **Hinges** tab\n* Change **Quantity** to desired amount"},{"_id":"4cd3f71ec47283019700026d","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1161044,"position":3,"parentId":"3c9cba4cf337e831d5000012","content":"##**Optomising**"},{"_id":"4cd3fa45c47283019700026e","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1192511,"position":1,"parentId":"4cd3f71ec47283019700026d","content":"** Accept Job First **\n Click on the green accept button - Click on the date highlighted blue.\n\n\n ** Producing the plans **\nClick on the drawings tab.\nCreate 2 sheets for printing.Click on new sheet Icon.\nRight click on the Plan or elevation - Click on (To Drawing)\nClick on reports for Cabinet report - Right click under the report - (To Drawings)\nPlace the plan & cabinet report on one page.\nPlace elevations on one page.Click on & drag over to page.\nPrinter will print both the elevation & the plan in one print.\nPrint 2 copys - Laminate 1 copy & staple the other in the file.\nClose & reopen the program after printing the plans to stop the program crashing.\n.\n.\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n Click on the Screen To Machine Icon (Above drawings)\nClick on the Windows/File Explorer (bottom of screen)\nChoose P: Drive - Double click on the month that the job is due for delivery.\n Click on ( New Folder ) Copy & paste or type in job number & name in the folder.\n Double click on the folders icon.\n Click on new folder - Paste or type in the job number, name & colour.\n Click on new folder - Paste or type in the job number,name & whiteboard.\n\nS2M\n\n Click on Filter parts - Materials - Tick on coloured board - Click OK.\n Click on Nest - Run - Click OK.\n Click on sheet pattens & check each sheet using the < > buttons.\n Click on NC Code & Lables.\n\nAdd files to output data\n\n Click on P: Drive - Click on the 3 dots - Double click on the delivery month - double click on the job name - Click on the colour board folder - Click OK.\n Repeat the same steps by clicking on the 3 dots for Label - IT & Label Images. When done - Click run & wait - Click close - OK - Print the colour board sheets.\n Click on the Return button & repeat all steps above for the whiteboard by starting from (Click on filter parts) - Under “Parts Screen”.\n When finished click on the return button to continue to “Rail List”\n\nRail List\n\n Click on filter parts - Materials - Click on rails - OK.\n Click on Nest - Run - Click OK.\n Click on Reports - Click on Rail List - Print - Click on the Return button.\n\nPaperwork for Factory\n\n Click on pre production list & find job.\n Click on the Job Detail Report in COL Pre production & tick the PP Box for all of the cabinets including (Boxed for delivery)\n Click on the Production Report tab - Print out paperwork.\n File paperwork in project file.\n"},{"_id":"3d14638dabf68563c3000073","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":310295,"position":2.25,"parentId":null,"content":"#**Alphacam Procedures**"},{"_id":"3d2d310c5bf3534db90000b2","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":2,"parentId":"3d14638dabf68563c3000073","content":"####**Selecting the Post**"},{"_id":"3d2d360c5bf3534db90000b5","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d2d310c5bf3534db90000b2","content":"* Run **Alphacam V7.5** \n* Click **Select Post**\n* Searching **(Y:) Drive**\n* Open **NC Center Data**\n* Open **Post**\n* Open **Anderson - Stratos**\n* Select & Open **Intelli-CAM - Tekcel K Series**"},{"_id":"3d2d33225bf3534db90000b3","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":3,"parentId":"3d14638dabf68563c3000073","content":"####**Opening a Job**"},{"_id":"3d2d368f5bf3534db90000b6","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d2d33225bf3534db90000b3","content":"* Searching **(P:) Drive** to find Current Job\n* Open **Month/Year Folder** of the Jobs EDD (Estimated Delivery Date)\n* Open **Job Master Folder**\n* Open **Job Colour Folder**\n* Open an **Alphacam Router Drawing** file\n - Suggested to open files in order\n* Click **Open**"},{"_id":"3d2d34155bf3534db90000b4","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":4,"parentId":"3d14638dabf68563c3000073","content":"####**Setting the Depth of the First Pass**"},{"_id":"3d2d371c5bf3534db90000b7","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3d2d34155bf3534db90000b4","content":"* Click **Hide All** under **Operations**\n* Scroll and Tick the **Master Tick-box** for the first **Finish Pass** commands\n* Click **Machine** drop-down\n* Highlight **Edit Machining** drop-down\n* Click **Tool Path Data**\n - This opens **EDIT TOOL PATHS** Menu at the bottom of the screen\n* Click **All**\n* Right Click the drawing\n - This opens the **Rough/Finish** Menu\n* Under **Z Levels** enter the current value into the **Final Depth** value box\n* Click **OK**\n - The second Menu Window will pop-up\n* Click **OK**\n* Right Click the Drawing\n - This will close the **EDIT TOOL PATHS** Menu\n* Click **Show ALL** under **Operations**\n* Click **Save**\n - Accept the prompted overwrite\n* Click **Output NC** save as current file name\n - Accept prompted overwrite"},{"_id":"45fc5b867b87667d81000234","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":310292,"position":2.5,"parentId":null,"content":"#**Product Knowledge Base**"},{"_id":"45fc5d4d7b87667d81000235","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1928495,"position":1,"parentId":"45fc5b867b87667d81000234","content":"#**Hardware**"},{"_id":"45fc60297b87667d81000237","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":5992283,"position":1,"parentId":"45fc5d4d7b87667d81000235","content":"\n**Drawer Heights ** \n\n** Metabox ** - Measured from the bottom of the drawer.\n N = 54mm\n \n M = 86mm\n \n K = 118mm\n \n H = 150mm\n\n** Antaro ** - Measured from the bottom of the drawer. \n\nN = 69mm\n\nM = 84mm\n\nB = 135mm\n\nC = 167mm\n\nD = 199mm\n\n** Innotech ** - Measured from the top of the bottom.\n\nN = 54mm\n\nM = 66mm\n\nB = 144m\n\nD = 176mm\n\n** Nova Pro ** - Measured from the bottom of the drawer.\n\nNP 67 = 57mm\n\nNP 90 = 84mm\n\nNP 122 = 116mm\n\nNP 90/67 Slide = 151mm\n\nNP 90/96 Slide = 183mm\n\nNP 122/67 Slide = 183mm"},{"_id":"5137a1dfaab2a348a4000269","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":8110237,"position":2,"parentId":"45fc5d4d7b87667d81000235","content":"**Aventos**\n\n**HK**\n* Minimum Carcase Depth: 277.5 (261 Internal).\n * Add 17mm onto depth for Servo\n* Clearance Between Top Shelf and Top of Cabinet:\n3 Pin: 236 (220 Internal)\n5 Pin: 268 (252 Internal)\n\n**HF**\n* Minimum Carcase Depth: 294.5 (278 Internal)\n* Shelves must sit back 25mm from front of cabinet\n* Clearance between Internal Top of Cabinet and Top Shelf (SC)\nFor 3 Pin Shelf: SC = MH + 42\nFor 5 Pin Shelf: SC = MH + 74\n * Distance between Internal Top of cabinet and Bottom of Mechanism (MH)\nMH = KH(480 to 549) x 0.3 - 28 + 72.5\nMH = KH(550 to 1040) x 0.3 - 57 + 72.5\nOverall Cabinet Height (KH)\n\n**HL**\n* Minimum Carcase Depth: 294.5 (278 Internal)\n* Shelves must sit back 56mm from front of cabinet\n* Clearance Between Top Shelf and Top of Cabinet:\n3 Pin: 222 (206 Internal)\n5 Pin: 254 (238 Internal)"},{"_id":"523dda0511831d2199000269","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1928499,"position":2,"parentId":"45fc5b867b87667d81000234","content":"#**Glass**"},{"_id":"523ddb0611831d219900026a","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1928506,"position":1,"parentId":"523dda0511831d2199000269","content":"**COL Glass Doors**\n\nCOL door glass\\shelves - polished all round\n\nGlass Size - 110 minus off the height and width for glass size\n\n**Polytec**\n\nPolytec door glass- straight cut edges/5 cent corners.\n\nGlass Size - 118 minus off the height and width for glass size\n\nCammeray Style Doors - 106 minus off the height and width for glass size"},{"_id":"3dbd0bdaec3e48326f0000c0","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":4,"parentId":null,"content":"#**Design Issuses**"},{"_id":"3dbd10cfec3e48326f0000c1","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3dbd0bdaec3e48326f0000c0","content":"##**Corner Cabinets**##"},{"_id":"3dbd35d35dd6195bca0000c3","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3dbd10cfec3e48326f0000c1","content":"###**Corners opening on Pantry panels**\n\nIf door is hinged on a pantry panel it will not open properly, contact customer.\n\nSOLUTION: Re hinge to other side of cabinet"},{"_id":"3dbd147aec3e48326f0000c2","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":560780,"position":2,"parentId":"3dbd0bdaec3e48326f0000c0","content":"##**Pantries**##"},{"_id":"3dbd39955dd6195bca0000c4","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":560790,"position":1,"parentId":"3dbd147aec3e48326f0000c2","content":"###**Inner Drawers on walls**\n\nIf a pantry has inner drawers and is situated on a wall, this cabinet will not work, as the doors will not open enough for the inner drawers and the customer must be contacted. \n\nSOLUTION: Use face filler wide enough for handle"},{"_id":"3e2660f833b13b13df0000cc","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":2,"parentId":"3dbd147aec3e48326f0000c2","content":"###**Corner Pantry Shelves**\n\n When the widths of the pantry are not the same size, the shelves will adjust to the left hand width\n\nSOLUTION: You have to adjust the right shelves to the desired length of the cabinet"},{"_id":"3f48c0d9b52f4dbf930000e2","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":95338,"position":3,"parentId":"3dbd147aec3e48326f0000c2","content":"###**Shallow Depth Shelves in Pantries**\nWhen a cabinet is under 540mm deep, shallow shelves become impractical to use as there is no room for pantry objects to fit in. \n\nSOLUTION: Customer must be called and told shallow shelves will not work. Suggest full depth shelves\n"},{"_id":"48317138276dd3469700025a","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":560787,"position":3,"parentId":"3dbd0bdaec3e48326f0000c0","content":"##**Drawer Fronts**##\n\n"},{"_id":"483172bf276dd3469700025b","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":560816,"position":1,"parentId":"48317138276dd3469700025a","content":"###**Handle less Drawer Fronts**\n\nWhen a handle less drawer front is below 147mm in height (standard measurement), issues become apparent with the drawer hardware sticking up over into the handle less rail area.\n\nSOLUTION: Customer must be called and advised of the issue and asked if they want it 'Absolute referenced' or change the drawer front height. "},{"_id":"3f966aebf739a55abd0000e2","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":95288,"position":6,"parentId":null,"content":"#**Office Flowchart**"},{"_id":"3f966c2ff739a55abd0000e3","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3f966aebf739a55abd0000e2","content":"Job arrives in pending -> Check order against database and schedule if correct, return if modifications are needed."},{"_id":"3f967040f739a55abd0000e4","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3f966c2ff739a55abd0000e3","content":"Job moves to Preproduction -> Setout staff member selects most appropriate job to start processing."},{"_id":"3f96760df739a55abd0000e5","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3f967040f739a55abd0000e4","content":"Job gets checked over and corrected for software to convert to machining. -> Accept job when checks are completed."},{"_id":"3f96828af739a55abd0000e7","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":2,"parentId":"3f96760df739a55abd0000e5","content":"Job moves to \"Ordering\" -> Print out all required paperwork (eg. Report, drawings, appliance specs and then optomise the materials."},{"_id":"3f968fd2f739a55abd0000e8","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"3f96828af739a55abd0000e7","content":"Once optomised -> Order materials to suit requirements. "},{"_id":"439e69f7b42f1709dc0001b0","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":95290,"position":7,"parentId":null,"content":"#** Factory Process **"},{"_id":"439e6b6eb42f1709dc0001b1","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":95293,"position":1,"parentId":"439e69f7b42f1709dc0001b0","content":"#**Store Room** "},{"_id":"42388fd75ab5f8349e00019a","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":95322,"position":0.5,"parentId":"439e6b6eb42f1709dc0001b1","content":"** Board Deliveries**"},{"_id":"423894c85ab5f8349e00019c","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":1,"position":1,"parentId":"42388fd75ab5f8349e00019a","content":"**Procedure**\n"},{"_id":"4262fd7e8f3786148200019e","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":220298,"position":1,"parentId":"423894c85ab5f8349e00019c","content":"* Unload Truck\n* Check invoice to match goods received\n * Colour\n * Finish\n * Substrate\n * Thickness\n * Quantity\n * Write job number on board\n * Go to computer bring up job number that is on invoice\n * Go to arriving\n * Chose correct vendor \n * Check invoice and order match, if so click on arrive\n if not click on fail. This brings up fail box\n * Fill in and save\n * Go to ordering and send order"},{"_id":"4501edefc75f69fb6a000211","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":220517,"position":1,"parentId":"4262fd7e8f3786148200019e","content":" * Place board in rack"},{"_id":"4238921a5ab5f8349e00019b","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":95323,"position":0.75,"parentId":"439e6b6eb42f1709dc0001b1","content":"** Hardware Deliveries**"},{"_id":"45016673c75f69fb6a000209","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":238442,"position":1,"parentId":"4238921a5ab5f8349e00019b","content":"Procedure Stock Hardware"},{"_id":"45016b84c75f69fb6a00020a","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":220361,"position":1,"parentId":"45016673c75f69fb6a000209","content":" * Goods arrive by courier\n * Remove invoice from package\n * Check invoice to match goods received\n * Place hardware in racking ( correct place )\n * Stamp invoice with received stamp and sign\n * Any goods missing or wrong , reception to chase up"},{"_id":"450192efc75f69fb6a00020c","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":220372,"position":2,"parentId":"4238921a5ab5f8349e00019b","content":"Procedure Job Hardware"},{"_id":"450196e9c75f69fb6a00020d","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":220485,"position":1,"parentId":"450192efc75f69fb6a00020c","content":" * Goods arrive by courier\n * Remove invoice from package\n * Check invoice to match goods received\n * Go to computer bring up job number that is on invoice \n * Go to arriving\n * Select correct vendor\n * Check invoice and order match if so click on arrive\n if not click on fail . This brings up fail box\n * Fill in and save\n * Go to ordering and send order "},{"_id":"4501dcf5c75f69fb6a000210","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":229343,"position":1,"parentId":"450196e9c75f69fb6a00020d","content":" * Write job number and name on goods \n * Place on shelf\n * Put with job when it is boxed"},{"_id":"454306ac053afd3b8d000210","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":238444,"position":2,"parentId":"439e6b6eb42f1709dc0001b1","content":"Polytec Manufactured Doors\n"},{"_id":"45430bf0053afd3b8d000211","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":238820,"position":1,"parentId":"454306ac053afd3b8d000210","content":"Procedure Ploytec Doors"},{"_id":"4544e9bbc44af0b3ca000212","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":393291,"position":1,"parentId":"45430bf0053afd3b8d000211","content":" * Check f0r job name and number\n * Go to job folder and remove door order\n * Check label on door for \n * Size\n * Color\n * Finish\n * Design\n * Check door for any defects\n * Bubbles\n * Vinyl lifting\n * Indents\n * Scratches \n * Find door on order \n * Check it is correct and mark order\n * Write cabinet number on label \n * If defect found take a note of ID number\n * Put door aside\n * Proceed with rest of pallet \n * When completed go to computer\n * Bring up Polytec Doors arriving\n * Arrive doors\n * Any defects , wrong doors, click on fail tab\n * Enter sales order number, Tab down\n * Enter ID number & Describtion of damaged item, Tab down.\n * Reason for fail.\n * Save\n * Go to ordering\n * Send order to Polytec "},{"_id":"455f52852bfe4f4e5c000222","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":249561,"position":3,"parentId":"439e6b6eb42f1709dc0001b1","content":"Hardware Boxing"},{"_id":"455f5ccb8479cb0c61000223","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":249567,"position":2,"parentId":"455f52852bfe4f4e5c000222","content":"Procedure Boxing Hardware for Jobs"},{"_id":"455f60208479cb0c61000224","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":393289,"position":1,"parentId":"455f5ccb8479cb0c61000223","content":" * Check calender \n * Select job for boxing\n *Click on Boxing tab to bring up hardware list\n *One part is for assembly - one for Delivery\n * Write job name and delivery on box\n * Get hardware marked for delivery and place in box\n * When done put on trolly\n * Do same for assembly\n * Check bench for any other hardware for job\n * Everything to be placed on one trolly "},{"_id":"439e6c8db42f1709dc0001b2","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":511574,"position":2,"parentId":"439e69f7b42f1709dc0001b0","content":"#**CNC Router** "},{"_id":"439e6d5fb42f1709dc0001b3","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":95295,"position":3,"parentId":"439e69f7b42f1709dc0001b0","content":"#**Edgebander** "},{"_id":"439e6de2b42f1709dc0001b4","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":511573,"position":4,"parentId":"439e69f7b42f1709dc0001b0","content":"#**Assembly** "},{"_id":"439e6ee1b42f1709dc0001b6","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":95301,"position":4.5,"parentId":"439e69f7b42f1709dc0001b0","content":"#**QA1** "},{"_id":"439e6e78b42f1709dc0001b5","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":95299,"position":5,"parentId":"439e69f7b42f1709dc0001b0","content":"#**Fit Off** "},{"_id":"439e6ff2b42f1709dc0001b7","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":95302,"position":6,"parentId":"439e69f7b42f1709dc0001b0","content":"#**QA2** "},{"_id":"439e7713b42f1709dc0001bf","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":95328,"position":6.5,"parentId":"439e69f7b42f1709dc0001b0","content":"#**Packaging** "},{"_id":"439e75acb42f1709dc0001bd","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":95326,"position":7,"parentId":"439e69f7b42f1709dc0001b0","content":"#**Loading** "},{"_id":"439e7627b42f1709dc0001be","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":95327,"position":1,"parentId":"439e75acb42f1709dc0001bd","content":"Local Delivey"},{"_id":"439e77efb42f1709dc0001c0","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":95330,"position":2,"parentId":"439e75acb42f1709dc0001bd","content":"Interstate"},{"_id":"439e783eb42f1709dc0001c1","treeId":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","seq":95332,"position":3,"parentId":"439e75acb42f1709dc0001bd","content":"International"}],"tree":{"_id":"3c9ca348f859a4131200000d","name":"COL Factory Processes","publicUrl":"col-factory-process-s"}}